JP2019166016A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent a decrease in interest.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of executing variable display and controlling to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes: variable display pattern determining means that can determine one variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns; variable display means that can execute variable display using the determined variable display pattern; specific state control means that can control a state to a specific state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player; and condition determining means that determines whether one predetermined condition is satisfied among a plurality of predetermined conditions corresponding to the number of executions of variable display that includes a first predetermined condition corresponding to the specific state and a second predetermined state corresponding to a non-specific state. The variable display pattern determining means, on the basis of the establishment of a predetermined condition, can determine a specific variable display pattern, and the type of the predetermined condition varies depending on the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-18

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  The conventional gaming machine can execute variable display with a specific variable display pattern based on the fact that the number of variable displays reaches a preset number of times, and the jackpot game at the end of the jackpot game (advantageous state) There are some which have different variable display counts set according to the type of them (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-115588 A

  However, in Patent Document 1, after the number of variable displays reaches a preset number and the variable display is executed with the specific variable display pattern, the variable display is executed with the specific variable display pattern. Since the same value is set as the number of variable displays until the time, the timing at which the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed becomes the same, that is, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the interest is lowered.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-14) capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of variable display patterns;
Variable display means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 5) capable of performing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern;
Specific state control means that is controllable to a specific state (for example, a short time state) that is different from the advantageous state and that is advantageous to the player (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 9-17) When,
The first predetermined condition corresponding to the specific state (for example, 50 times or 100 times of variable display controlled to the short time state was executed) and the second predetermined state corresponding to the non-specific state (for example, the short time state is Condition determination for determining whether one predetermined condition among a plurality of predetermined conditions corresponding to the number of executions of variable display is satisfied, including 79 times and 128 times variable display after completion) Means (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the counter for period determination value is 5 in the process of 211 SGS180 of the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-14);
With
The variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, the CPU 103 performs a cycle in the processing of 211 SGS180 in the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-14). After determining that the value of the determination value counter is 5, a portion in which the variation pattern is determined to be super reach loss PA2-2 by selecting the variation pattern determination table E for loss in the processing of 211SGS182),
The type of the predetermined condition differs depending on the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the super reach loss PA2-2 due to the value of the period determination value counter being 5. The number of fluctuations until it is determined (more precisely, the number of fluctuations until the value of the cycle judgment value counter becomes 0) has changed to a fluctuation pattern because the value of the period judgment value counter has reached 5 so far. (Parts differ according to the number of times determined for Super Reach Loss PA2-2)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the timing at which variable display using a specific variable display pattern is changed by selecting different types of predetermined conditions according to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing a decrease in interest. Can do.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
Advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol stop process shown in FIGS. 9-16) that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states advantageous to the player (for example, the big hit A big hit gaming state or the big hit B big hit gaming state). The portion for executing the processes of 211SGS203 to 211SGS212 in
The type of the initial predetermined condition after the end of the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-19, after the big hit game of the big hit A ends, all the variable display results are lost. Then, the 125th or 175th variation display after the big hit game is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss, and after the big hit game of the big hit B is completed, all the variation display results are lost. 174th or 224th variation display after the big hit game ends is the part that is executed with the variation pattern of Super Reach α Loss)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the type of the initial predetermined condition differs depending on the type of advantageous state, the monotonous tendency of selection of a specific variable display pattern can be avoided and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or means 2,
After the end of the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the cycle determination counter is set in the special symbol low processing 211SGS223 shown in FIG. 9-16), the identification corresponding to the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied Specific calculation means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of 211SGS224 to 211SGS228 of special symbol low processing shown in FIG. 9-16) capable of executing a specific calculation using a value,
The predetermined condition of a different type corresponding to the calculation result of the specific calculation can be determined as the predetermined condition,
There are a plurality of types of the specific values, and the specific value of any type is set corresponding to the control of the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 executes the processing of the special symbol low processing 211SGS229 shown in FIG. 9-16. A part for setting a value corresponding to the remaining loop number counter value based on the set scenario data to the counter for period determination),
The type of the specific value to be set differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, the numerical values that can be set after the big hit game of the big hit A is “50”, “100”, “79 ”And“ 128 ”, whereas the numerical value that can be set after the big hit game of big hit B is“ 50 ”,“ 100 ”, and“ 128 ”are three pieces)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by selecting different specific values depending on the types of advantageous states, it is possible to easily realize the selection of different types of predetermined conditions.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 3,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 5), including at least the condition determining means, the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display means;
Effect control means for controlling the effect based on the control information received from the game control means (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control process shown in FIG. 7);
Further comprising
The variable display means can execute variable display based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied after the start condition for executing variable display is satisfied (for example, the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-10 by the CPU 103). , Part for executing the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 9-11 and the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-13),
The game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the remaining number of variable displays until the predetermined condition is satisfied, as the control information when the start condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. 9). The part which performs transmission setting of the period determination value notification command in the process of 211SGS136 or 211SGS137 of the random number determination process at the time of winning shown in -11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute an effect based on the remaining number of variable displays until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 4,
The effect control means is configured to display a suggestion effect suggesting execution of variable display by the specific variable display pattern based on the specific information, and a plurality of variable displays before the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed. (For example, the production control CPU 120 presumes that the predetermined period variation is reserved by executing the processes 211SGS345a and 211SGS345b in the prefetching advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-23. (The part that displays the hold display based on the memory with the display pattern α over multiple variable displays)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance a sense of expectation that variable display of a specific variable display pattern is executed, and it is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 5,
The variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the remaining number of variable displays until the predetermined condition is satisfied is equal to or less than the predetermined number. In the specific period before the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-14, any one of 1 to 128 is included in the cycle determination counter). When the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0, when the value set in the period determination counter is not 1 to 9, the variation pattern setting process for losing is determined in the variation pattern setting process. Even when Table A to Loss Variation Pattern Determination Table D are selected, the Super Reach α Loss Variation Pattern (PA2-2) is determined. 9-14, as shown in FIG. 9-14, if the value of the counter for period determination is 6 to 9, that is, before the predetermined period fluctuation 1 to 4 fluctuations, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation for loss (Part in which the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is uniquely determined by selecting the pattern determination table F)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect from becoming unclear and the interest of the suggestion effect from decreasing.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to means 6,
The variable display pattern determining means does not determine the specific variable display pattern in response to the first predetermined condition being satisfied, whereas the specific variable display pattern determining means does not determine the specific variable display pattern in response to the second predetermined condition being satisfied. The display pattern is determined (for example, when the CPU 103 determines that the time reduction flag is set in the processing of 211SGS181 of the variation pattern setting processing shown in FIG. 9-14, that is, the number of times the time reduction control is executed at the end of the big hit game When the same number as “50” or “100” is set as the initial value of the cycle determination counter, the cycle determination counter value is 5 by selecting the loss variation pattern determination table D. The variable pattern (PA2-2) of Super Reach α Loss is not uniquely determined in response to “79”, “128”, etc. When the period determination counter is set as the initial value, if the value of the period determination counter is 5, the variation pattern determination table E for the loss is selected to uniquely identify the fluctuation pattern (PA2- Part that determines 2)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display pattern can be determined only in the non-specific state while the predetermined condition can be set in common for both the specific state and the non-specific state. The selection tendency of the variable display pattern that matches the state can be simply realized.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot type in a special symbol display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the shift aspect of a 1st holding | maintenance display and a 2nd holding | maintenance display. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every jackpot type in a round indicator. It is a back perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), (B) is the explanatory drawing which shows the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of the display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flowchart which shows a game control main process. (A) is a flowchart which shows a RAM clear process, (B) is the schematic of RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a figure which shows the display mode of the display monitor at the time of a cold start, (B) shows the display mode of the display monitor at the time of resetting from the occurrence of a set value abnormality error or power failure during setting change FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display apparatus in execution of a setting change process, a hold display apparatus, a right-handed lamp, and a round indicator, and (B) is at the time of the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error, or Indicates the change in the display mode of the special symbol display device when returning from a power interruption during setting change It is a figure which shows a part of timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize | stored in RAM, and the state cleared. It is explanatory drawing which shows the initial symbol for every received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the alerting | reporting aspect at the time of starting of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process process. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A, big hit B), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit C, big hit D), (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the data holding area for game control. (A) is a figure which shows the data holding area for production control, (B) is a figure which shows the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a timing chart which shows the content of the output through period judgment value notification command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern which can perform a fluctuation display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is explanatory drawing of scenario data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation aspect at the time of setting each scenario data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a background image update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of a hold display notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution regulation period of a hold display notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display period of each background image. It is explanatory drawing in the case of not providing the restriction | limiting period of a hold display notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution aspect of a holding | maintenance display announcement effect. It is explanatory drawing in the case where there exists a holding memory which can perform a holding display announcement effect, and a holding memory which cannot be executed. It is explanatory drawing in the case where there exists a holding memory which can perform a holding display announcement effect, and a holding memory which cannot be executed. It is explanatory drawing when the pending | holding memory | storage which can perform a pending | holding display announcement effect by electric power interruption, and the pending | holding memory which cannot be performed generate | occur | produce. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus when scenario data A is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the determination aspect of the frequency | count of fluctuation | variation of each period in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in this specification, the comparison expression of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “difference”) means that one is a ratio of “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding feature 207SG of this embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-7, a pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a game board (gauge) constituting a game board surface. Board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 has a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window between a door opening position where the front side of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opens around the left side and a door closing position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 207SG003a so that the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk of the game hall into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and players other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L in which a game ball can flow down. 2 is formed in a right game area 207SG002R in which a game ball can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a game ball hit relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 207SG002R is the left game area 207SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area where a game ball that has been launched more strongly than a game ball that flows down (right-handed) passes through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is provided with a general winning opening 10, and the right game area 207SG002R has a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and a general game from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 are arranged. That is, the game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can win the first start winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball apparatus 6A, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R are variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 can be won and can pass through the passing gate 41.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second start prize opening or the big prize opening, and the game balls flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot win the first start prize opening. It has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. In addition, the main board 11 includes a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a setting value changing state that can be changed, and a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) described later in the setting value changing state. A setting changeover switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value change state in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a shop clerk or the like can check the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation state) It is also.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052, is housed in the board case 207SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation is extremely difficult when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed, and a predetermined door key is pressed. The operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 207SG003. Further, since the lock switch 207SG051 requires an operation of a setting key owned by a game shop clerk or the like, only the clerk possessing the setting key can be operated. Also, the lock switch 207SG051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation to be described later with a setting key. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment, although the door key and the setting key have illustrated the form which is a separate key, these may be combined with 1 key.

  The substrate case 207SG201 is provided with a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is disposed on the upper part of the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is disposed on the front surface when the main substrate 11 is visually recognized in the substrate case 207SG201. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened. It is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the predetermined position (for example, the lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is A first special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing a variable display of one special figure, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of executing a variable display of a second special figure, and a first reserved display capable of displaying a first reserved memory number 207SG025A, second reserved display unit 207SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, normal symbol display unit 207SG020 capable of executing the variation display of the normal symbol, general figure reserved display unit 207SG025C capable of displaying the number of stored general figure memory Round indicator 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (type of jackpot) of the jackpot game during the jackpot game, high base state (short time state) and jackpot game A right-handed lamp 207SG132 that is turned on in a gaming state in which a game ball in a state or the like is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R, a probability-changing lamp 207SG133 that is lit when in a probable state, and a short-time lamp 207SG134 that is lit in a high base state (short-time state). A game information display unit 207SG200 is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. In addition, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variation display result of the special symbol is lost or small hit, the variation display result can be derived and displayed in a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A displays the fluctuation display result with two types of big hit symbols (a combination of LEDs that are lit) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. In the case where the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B displays the fluctuation with two types of big hit symbols (a combination of LEDs that are lit) for each big hit type. Results and derivation can be displayed.

  In the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B all have different jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B can be at least partially overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 8-5, each of the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B has four segments of LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and the second from the left as the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left turn on sequentially. Each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold indicator corresponding to the variable display is changed in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) according to the decrease of the stored memory (consumed). In part 207SG, the light is turned off in the left direction.

  In the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory exist, the variable display based on the second special figure reservation memory is executed with priority. It is like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-6, for example, when there is one first special figure hold memory and two second special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 207SG025A) Is on and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are turned on), the second special figure hold memory is zero by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure holding memory is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit types in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, there are three big hit types: big hit A which is big round 5 big hit, big hit B which is big hit 10 rounds, big hit C which is big hit 15 rounds. Depending on the type of jackpot, which of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is turned on differs.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  In addition, the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 that can be operated between the origin position and the effect position during variable display, and the like. An origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. An origin detection sensor 207SG332 that can detect this is connected.

  FIG. 8-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature section 207SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating the start of change in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a change display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), a determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. ) Or different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of jackpot types when the variation display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating stoppage (decision) of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time reduction control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a gaming state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state) , The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the short time state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set in accordance with the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning mouth opening notification command and the big winning mouth opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set setting value from main board 11 to effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (it is also called a power failure recovery, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value changing operation has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a setting value check start notification command for notifying that the setting value checking operation has been started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting value checking state). The command E106H is a set value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 8-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  In this embodiment, each random number value MR1 to MR5 is exemplified as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-9, but the present invention is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be varied according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-10 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variation display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach lose variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 8-10, the special reach variation pattern of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is performed in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is represented by super reach α and super reach β that are super reach variation patterns. Is set shorter. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is set to “hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set higher. In the super reach variation pattern, the longer the variation time, the higher the expectation of jackpot.

  Note that, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are set by changing the type of the fluctuation pattern such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, or the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination first, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and these variations are determined. The variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number for pattern type determination It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 8-10, although the variation content (effect content) is previously determined for every variation pattern, this invention has shown to this. The present invention is not limited, and the variation content (effect content) may be different even for the same variation pattern according to the set value that has been set. For example, in the case of the normal reach loss variation pattern PA2-1, if the set value is 1, the variation pattern is a normal reach loss, and if the set value is 2, the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. If the set value is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times and the change pattern becomes super reach loss ...

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-11 to 8-13 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), a display result determination table (setting value 2) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and FIG. -11 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), and display result determination table (set value 4) shown in FIG. 8-12 (B). Set value 5), display result determination table (set value 6) shown in FIG. 8-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), FIG. B) Big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in B), big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, loss variation pattern determination table, general diagram display result determination table (not shown), general diagram Variation pattern determination Buru is included (not shown) and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases step by step as the values decrease in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, the set value is a value that is the most unfavorable for the game arcade side, which is 6 which is the largest value. Become.

  FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the feature section 207SG of the present embodiment, the common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. 8-12 (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the gaming state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more judgment values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of “big hit” than in the normal state or the short time state (low accuracy state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as the “big hit” in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and the setting Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, and 1/200 when the setting value is 6, the special figure display result is controlled as a big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of determination increases (in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, 1/20 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1/180 when the set value is 3. 160, 1/140 when set value is 4, set If it is 5 1/120, 1/100 in the case of setting value of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state), the probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared to the normal state or the short time state The determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, a determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlling to the small hit gaming state is the same regardless of the gaming state and the set value. It has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. 8-12 (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C), regardless of the gaming state and the set value, The probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlling to the small hit gaming state is set to 1/200. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, although the special figure display result is “small hit” regardless of the set value, the probability that it is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” and controlled to the small hit gaming state may be varied according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is controlled. The determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling to the big hit gaming state is higher as the set value is lower (high hit probability: set value 6> set value) 5> set value 4> set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

  In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value is changed from FIG. 8-11 (A) to FIG. 8-11 (C) and FIG. When it matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hits shown in (A) to FIG. 8-12 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). In addition, MR1 matches one of the hit judgment values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C) are probabilities (proportions) and small hits to be big hits. The probability (ratio) of becoming. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 causes the display results shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C) and FIGS. 8-12 (A) to 8-12 (C). Whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using a judgment table is determined, but a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and whether the fluctuation display result is a big hit Whether or not to make a small hit may be determined individually.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six set values 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less, or 7 or more.

  8-13 (A) and FIG. 8-13 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 8-13 (A) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when doing. Further, FIG. 8-13 (B) determines the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Table.

  The big hit type determination table is one of the big hit types A to C based on the random number for determining the hit type (MR2) when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probability variable big hit) in which only the time-shortening control is executed after the big hit gaming state ends and shifts to a low probability high base state, A big hit B and big hit C (also called a probable big hit) are set in which the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed after the completion and the state shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state.

  The big hit game state by “hit A” is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by “B” is a normally open big hit which is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by “hit C” is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state by the “big hit A” is executed by a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment) of the special game, or the predetermined number of special times. The game ends when the big hit gaming state is entered before the game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C is continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit gaming state ends. Therefore, when the big hit that is generated again is the big hit B or big hit C, since the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state is finished, the big hit gaming state is continuously performed without going through the normal state. The so-called villa state occurs.

  In the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, three types of big hit A to big hit C are illustrated as the big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 2 You may provide below the kind or four or more kinds.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. Also, when the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “3”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “4”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A in the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the big hit B. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the big hit B. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “6”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, the ratio for determining the big hit A in which only the short time control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the short time control after the big hit game ends. Of the big hits B and big hits C for which both of the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special chart is the first special symbol, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the set value is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the big hit B. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. Also, when the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A in the MR2 judgment value range 0 to 299, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the big hit B. 160 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “4”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to jackpot B. 140 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the big hit B. 120 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “6”, out of the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. (No judgment value is assigned to big hit B).

  In this way, when a big win occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, while the ratio for determining the big hit A in which only the short time control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, the short time control after the big hit game ends Of the big hits B and big hits C for which both of the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the setting value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the highest when the setting value is 6, and the setting value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  In the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation special chart is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined as the big hit B. The form that does not do is illustrated, that is, that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it means that any jackpot type is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) Although it is included, even when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case where the big hit type is determined as the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit differs according to the set value that is set, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

  In the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for determining the big hit type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is You may determine using MR1 which is a random value for special figure display result determination.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous for the player (the higher the probability of jackpot, the easier it is to determine the jackpot C as the jackpot type) However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gameability itself does not change, but the present invention However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game performance (so-called probability variation loop type) in which the big hit probability in the normal state loops at a rate of 1/320 and the probability variation state is 65%, When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 during the big hit game. The game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be a probable change state based on passing the game, while the game balls having different proportions of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game according to the fluctuation figure (so-called V If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is in the high base (during short-time control). Specially variable ball A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameability is the same, but the big hit probability or There may be provided a setting (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) with a small number of winning balls that can be acquired during the big hit game while the small hit probability is high. .

  Further, in this way, when the gameability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different applications. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is used as an effect switch (every game ball passes a predetermined area). Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a gaming switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch) It may be used as a switch for controlling to the big hit gaming state.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. ing.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns of normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-15 (A) and 8-15 (B), the big hit variation pattern determination table is a big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the big hit type is big hit A. And a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) that are used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance. A) and the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), the variation pattern for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and the big hit for super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined value within a range that can be taken by the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination A random value is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 8-15 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges from 1 to 997. Up to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for super reach α big hit, and 85 to 997 are super reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per β big hit. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) per normal reach, and 381 to 835 are assigned. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “3”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) per normal reach big hit, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “4”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) per normal reach, and 341 to 805 are assigned. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “5”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, from 321 to 790. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. Further, when the set value is “6”, 1 to 300 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 301 to 775. Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big.

  As shown in FIG. 8-15 (B), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 judgment value ranges from 1 to 997. 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for normal reach big hit, 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for super reach α big hit, and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 180 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) for the normal reach big hit, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. Also, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 160 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big hit. When the set value is “4”, 1 to 140 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 121 to 390 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big. When the set value is “6”, 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 101 to 350 is the range. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β big.

  Thus, when the big hit A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit Higher and lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the big hit B or big hit C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) for the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are the big hit type “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In such a case, since the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player who may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the sense of expectation.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random value out of a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits is a determination value. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the MR3 determination value range of 0 to 997 is used when the set value is any one of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the small hit variation pattern. You may determine the small fluctuation pattern with the setting value 1-6 from a several fluctuation pattern in a different ratio.

  The loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A that is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in a low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time reduction control, and a low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D that is used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without reduction, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low-base total sum storage number), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value Among the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) from 1 to 410, and from 411 to 700 is set. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 390 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total number of reserved memories of 2 to 4. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for the α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), in the variation pattern determination table B for loss (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), if the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700 are It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) in the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997, and 461 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 440 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), and the range 401 to 700 is assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Also, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach corresponding to the total reserved memory number of 5 to 8. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to a variation pattern determining random value MR3 for the α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) and the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 8-16 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for the number of low base medium total pending storages of 5 or more), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value Among the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are allocated to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are allocated to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. When the set value is “2”, out of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 511 to 700 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are the same. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “5”, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, and 471 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  In the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of super reach α loss ( PA2-2), a predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss, out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in the variation pattern determination table D for loss (for medium high base), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach lose pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach lose pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are the super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the loss, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. Also, when the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, and 531 to 700 are. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).
When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “5”, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997, and 471 to 700 are included. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the MR3 determination value range 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) of normal reach loss, 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α loss, and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss (901 to 997) ( PA2-3).

  Thus, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the ratio for determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio for determining the super-reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio for determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern. Are set so as to decrease in the order of setting values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for losing, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, among the determination values, 701 to 900 are the variation pattern of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the variation pattern of the super reach β loss. If the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each fluctuation pattern, that is, if the fluctuation display result is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the presentation effect from deteriorating due to the fact that the variable display by is not executed.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination pattern of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely the same between the set values as the variation pattern for loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are between the set values. May be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

  Note that the feature 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value when the variation display result is lost. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variation display result is lost, the determination ratios of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach are the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of any variation pattern of non-reach and normal reach may be the same.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach α is obtained when the variable display result is lost. The determination ratio of only one of the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the loss and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the variation pattern for the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the feature portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is lost, the non-reach and normal reach variation patterns are determined in different proportions according to the set value. Depending on the set value, there may be one or more undecided variation patterns among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value is that any variation pattern is not determined (the determination proportion is 0%) or a specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine at a rate of

  Note that the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach loss variation more than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter variation time (see FIG. 8-10). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach loss variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, the winning prize makes it difficult to generate useless starting prizes that are not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening with a long fluctuation time ( By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time of the variable display.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment, as shown to FIGS. 8-16 (A)-FIG. 8-16 (C), it fluctuates using the variation pattern determination table for loss which changes according to the total number of pending storage. Although the form which determines a pattern is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The number of holding | maintenance memory | storage in the special symbol of a fluctuation | variation object (For example, when performing the fluctuation | variation display of a 1st special symbol, it is 1st. The variation pattern may be determined by using a variation pattern determination table for losing that differs depending on the number of special symbols held and the variation display of the second special symbol.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 6, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The ranges of random number values assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the change display is actually executed in the change pattern of the super reach lose (the change pattern of the super reach lose) (Appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the mode in which the change display is executed in the change pattern of the super reach lose according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the change display shows the change in the super reach loss. It may be executed in a pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8A may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure hold storage unit, a second special figure hold storage unit, a general figure hold storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure that has not yet started even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. Hold data of a game (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit establishes the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening. The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern extraction extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the This is stored until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to win a big hit.

  The second special figure holding storage unit has a start prize (second start prize) that has not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B. The holding data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit establishes the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball in association with the hold number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening. The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for variation pattern extraction extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the The number is stored until reaching a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) To hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to win a big hit.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The usual figure holding storage unit stores the holding information of the usual figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure hold storage unit associates the hold numbers with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so as to be updateable by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 8-17 (A), the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is configured by 7 segments configured by seven segments that draw a character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E can be turned on and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short period.

  In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment is executed using a non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is tested. .

  In the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (B) and 8-17 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 balls in all gaming states Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), Base 1 that is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all gaming states, and in all gaming states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) every second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) every third 6000 balls in all gaming states It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in (1). Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed on display monitor 207SG029 as percentages.

  When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “L.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “bL.” Which is an abbreviation of the base L. ”Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values“ 00 ”to“ 99 ”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “b1.”, Which is an abbreviation of the base. And the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 2 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “b2.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. And the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display “b3.” Which is an abbreviation of the base. And the upper two digits (values “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 of the present embodiment, control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2 and the base 3 is executed under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the main board 11 executes control for switching the display on the display monitor 207SG029 at intervals of 5 seconds in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3. The display of each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is different in display color according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine When the set value set to 1 is “2”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “3”, it is displayed. Each base value in the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value set to “5” is displayed, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red and set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. If the set value is "6" displays the base value in the display monitor 207SG029 at purple. For this reason, the game shop clerk and the like can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 207SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main process in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets the interruption prohibited (207SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). When the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or when the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether a normal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; Y) Whether or not a setting value changing flag indicating that a setting value changing process (to be described later) was being executed before power interruption (that a power interruption occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. Is determined (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017. If the setting value changing flag is not set, a RAM clear flag indicating that a RAM clear process described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated. (207SGSa008).

  When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 turned on and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. (207SGSa013a) is determined.

  When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the setting value changing process (207SGSa013b) for changing the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag is set. Is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processing of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 this time (the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed). 207SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is set to the power supply stop (power interruption). Recovery processing for returning to the state is performed (207SGSa015).

  In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be. And CPU103 transmits the command at the time of a recovery including a hot start notification command with respect to the production | presentation control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered in the state before power interruption (hot start), and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  In 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a state where the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) and whether the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal set value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a formal procedure by the operation of a game hall employee or the like (the pachinko gaming machine 207SG003 is opened and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while operating the clear switch) When the machine 1 is activated), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). And the process of 207SGSa009-207SGSa016 mentioned above is performed.

  When the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), when the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), and when the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  In 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (207SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. Cold start notification is started by starting flashing (207SGSa024).

  After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025) and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has expired (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processing of 207SGSa025 and 207SGSa026 is repeated, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029 Blinks (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  The feature 207SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over a period of a cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is called and started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may blink. In addition, at least some of the segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 may be lit.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initial setting of the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and an interrupt is permitted (207SGSa030). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 determines whether or not an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), or after returning from a power interruption during a setting change to be described later. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the set value abnormality is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has expired (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B that constitute the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) that a set value abnormality error has occurred or that a power failure has occurred during a setting change. , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a game hall management computer via a terminal board (not shown) provided at 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). Thereafter, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the power interruption of the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation of a shop clerk or the like), thereby displaying the display monitor 207SG029. The error notification by the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is executed.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment has the display monitor 207SG029, the first monitor when the abnormal set value is set or the power is interrupted while the set value is changed. Since the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B perform error notification, the game shop clerk and the like can generate errors and set values from both the front and back sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize the return from the power interruption during the change. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the return from the power interruption while changing the set value can be recognized also in the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

  In the game control main process of the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The mode of executing the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear process If it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (20 SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

  FIG. 8-21 (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clear process (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear process, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, “00H” is set (stored) at the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is an address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. (207SGSa45).

  If the designated address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the designated address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the next step is further performed. Is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). If the designated address is the last address in the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clear process is terminated.

  Note that the RAM 102 in the feature unit 207SG of this embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area, as shown in FIG. Among these storage areas, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored at the top address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the top of the RAM 102 will be described later. Temporary setting values are stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored at the third address (F002). In other addresses (F003 and later), special figure hold memory, general figure hold memory, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. . Note that backup data (including a backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among areas where other information is stored. In addition, a value indicating the factory shipment state (for example, set value “0”) is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. It should be noted that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the first address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail. It may be prompted to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clear process in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment is a process of clearing data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing “00H” at an address excluding the set value.

  Note that the feature 207SG in the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When activated at the start, only game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (after the address F003 in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment) may be cleared.

  In addition, in the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, a mode in which a RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as a game control microcomputer. By storing it in 100 registers (for example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register), the process of storing or reading the RAM clear flag in the RAM 102 is omitted, The processing load on the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  FIG. 8-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one segment among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value change process (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts to light (207SGSa052a).

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether any value 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as a setting value in the RAM 102, or when a setting value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the setting value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the setting value is set at the address F000 in the RAM 102. Then, “1” is set (setting value is reset to “1”), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). If any value of 1 ^ & is stored as a set value in the RAM 102 (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power-off detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer has expired (207SGSa056). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Performs power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

  After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the game hall (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets a setting value changing flag (207SGSa061), and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When there is no operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065. When there is an operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052 (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is a setting value advantageous to the player by one step over the “1”, is set as a temporary setting value. If the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “2”, “3”, which is a setting value advantageous to the player by one step over the “2”, is temporarily set. A numerical value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored as the setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102, is stored as the borrowing setting at the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is “6”, “1” may be stored as a temporary setting value at the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  The CPU 103 displays the setting value (temporary setting value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or to store it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or provisional setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. (207SGSa067), all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned off (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072. If the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), the temporary setting value is further stored in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the provisional setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  When the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the provisional setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and stored in the address F000 in the RAM102. If the set value value stored in the address F001 differs from the set value value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is set to the address F000. Store (207SGSa071) and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the process of 207SGSa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the set value change process.

  FIG. 8-23 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first starts lighting all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 8-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 sets only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation processing (a mode that is neither big hit A, big hit B, or big hit C shown in FIG. 8-6). Starts to light (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power-off detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power-off detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power-off detection processing execution start waiting timer has expired (207SGSa107). When the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power-off detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Performs a power-off detection process (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same process as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value change process described above.

  After executing the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 starts displaying the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer at the game hall (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is terminated (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. Are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a set value check end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the set value check process.

  As described above, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B, and the round indicator 207SG131 are turned on and the first hold indicator 207SG025A, second from the start of the set value change processing and the set value confirmation processing. By starting the flashing of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, a player or a game clerk can change the set value or the set value from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the confirmation is in progress.

  It should be noted that in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, at the start of the set value change process and the set value check process, as a mode according to the set value change process and the set value check process, of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 The mode of lighting only one LED is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is the big hit A, big hit shown in FIG. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it does not correspond to either B or big hit C.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), at the start of the setting value changing process and the setting value checking process, an aspect according to the setting value changing process and the setting value checking process As an example, the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are lit in the same manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 are set value changes. You may light in the aspect which is different at the time of the start of a process, and the time of the start of a setting value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (disconnected) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. And the clear switch are turned on to execute the setting value changing process.

  At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (A) to 8-25 (E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different number of display units when executing the set value changing process at the time of activation and when displaying the base value after the activation is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the setting value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (powered off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on while the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. Setting value confirmation processing is executed by setting (clear switch OFF).

  At this time, in the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), FIG. 8-25 (B), and FIG. 8-25 (E), the first power is turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 8-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to the present embodiment uses different numbers of display copies when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of activation and when the base value is displayed after the activation is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Note that the display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a playable state.

  FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart illustrating the power interruption detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the setting value change process and the setting value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has decreased to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If there is no power-off signal input (207SGS081; N), the process ends. If there is a power-off signal input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, check data used when restoring the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), and then the process proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

  In the game control timer interrupt process in the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the CPU 103 executes the same power-off detection process (207SGS200) as the above-described 207SGSa057 and 207SGSa108. S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed later.

  Next, processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and also sets the CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer corresponding to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by -1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; N), the processing of 207SGS404 and 207SGS405 is repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  When the command reception waiting timer times out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is recovered from the power interruption, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player in the player information input process described later) After receiving the input of information, information including the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of super reaches, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  When no hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When a cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), player information and presentation information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, (Information including the number of times of super reach) (207SGS409), the information stored in the RAM 102 is cleared, and the player information and the production information stored in the RAM 122 are cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 in the image display device 5 are cleared as shown in the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-33 (A)). Display of the notification image 207SG005M1) to notify that, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the store clerk at the game hall that started the pachinko gaming machine 1 For example, it is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 are cleared. Then, after the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If no cold start notification command is received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A setting value related notification process is executed to execute notification that the operation is being performed (notification while the setting value is being changed) and notification that the setting value is being confirmed (notification that the setting value is being confirmed) (207SGS412).

  Note that in the characteristic unit 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-33 (B) and FIG. The notification image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting change value is being updated and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state. A state where the game machine 207SG003 is generally opened and a store clerk or the like who changes or confirms the set value visually recognizes the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in a state of being. That is, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which an image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized from a store clerk or the like of the game hall that changes or confirms the set value. From the display on the image display device 5, it is considered that the game shop clerk cannot determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state. Therefore, as notification during setting value change or notification during setting value confirmation, a pachinko gaming machine is used for a game clerk who changes or confirms the setting value by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R or light emission from the game effect lamp 9. You may alert | report that 1 has started in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state.

  Returning to FIG. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 further determines whether or not a setting value change end notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the setting value change end notification command and the setting value confirmation end notification command are not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412. When the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y) Advances to 207SGS427.

  If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command are not received in 207SGS411 (207SGS411; N), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command is received (207SGS425). . When an error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), an error notification process (207SGS426) for performing error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when no error designation command is received (207SGS425; N). , 207SGS403.

  As the error notification in the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-33 (D), the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error specified from the error designation command is displayed on the image display device 5. Good.

  As described above, in the effect control main process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by hot start, player information (the player information The number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reaches, etc. since the input of the game is cleared from the RAM 122, while the information for production (the number of fluctuations since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) ) And set value information (any numerical value of “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) is not cleared from the RAM 122. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value change state or the setting confirmation state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The set value information is overwritten (update stored).

  That is, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. Yes.

  Then, in 207SGS427, the effect control CPU 120 identifies which one of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is not set, display of decorative symbols is started with the combination of “1”, “2”, and “3” from the left on the image display device 5 as initial symbols. Further, when the received command is a set value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 has “ Display of decorative symbols is started with a combination of “4”, “5”, and “6”.

  In the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” ”,“ 6 ”is illustrated as an example of starting the display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example,“ 6 ”) advantageous to the player is provided. If it is set, the combination of “4”, “5”, and “6” as the initial symbol at a higher rate than when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set. It may be displayed. By doing in this way, it can be suggested that a setting value advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the gaming interest can be improved.

  In the feature portion 207SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” ”,“ 6 ”is illustrated as an example of starting the display of decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example,“ 6 ”) advantageous to the player is provided. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting value is set and the case where the setting value unfavorable to the player (for example, “1”) is set. In addition, when a setting value (for example, “6”) advantageous to the player is set and when a setting value (for example, “1”) unfavorable for the player is set, the speakers 8L and 8R You may make it vary the volume of the sound to output, the light quantity of the game effect lamp 9, etc. FIG.

  Then, returning to FIG. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” in the prefetch restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes an activation notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated (207SGS431). In the activation notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interruption since the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, or a set value check end notification command is received, The activation notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the activation notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interruptions to start the pachinko machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. What is necessary is just to perform alerting | reporting.

  In the feature unit 207SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is any one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value check end notification command. Depending on whether or not there is an activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new one is added to the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Note that the light emission start timing for 60 seconds of these game effect lamps 9 and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound A from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds may be different.

  Further, when a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new setting value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and data in the RAM 102 is cleared The game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and outputs the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Note that the light emission start timing for 60 seconds of these game effect lamps 9 and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R are the same, but the light emission start timings of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B from the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits light for 60 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R output sound for 30 seconds. Includes both performing the output of B.

  Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output sound C is output and a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed) is displayed on the image display device 5. It should be noted that the light emission start timing for 40 seconds of these game effect lamps 9, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same. The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. In contrast, since a message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, although the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is illustrated using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5, it is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management device such as a game hall management computer or each counter, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As an activation notification at the time, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment, a part of the apparatus that performs the activation notification is common even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in any of hot start, cold start, setting change state, and setting confirmation state. Although there is an example of a mode in which light emission from the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed in any case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot. The device that performs the activation notification differs depending on whether it is activated in the start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a signal is output from the external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Moreover, you may vary the alerting | reporting aspect in each apparatus which performs starting alerting | reporting according to whether the pachinko game machine 1 was started by hot start, cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, all the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are caused to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state. In some cases, only a part of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be caused to emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is open, so that sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some of the speakers), and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with a cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all the speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting changing”, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 When starting at the start, the image display device 5 may display a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 is cleared, such as “RAM is cleared”.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-described external output terminals, the terminals that output signals to the management device may be made different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state, a period until the change of the set value is completed (until the setting value change end notification command or the set value designation command is received) as the setting value change notification. A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device over a period of time, and after the change of the setting value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

  In addition, when using an external output terminal in common with each alerting | reporting, you may make it vary the timing which outputs a signal with respect to a management apparatus according to each alerting | reporting.

  As described above, in the start notification process, the form in which the start notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The activation notification may be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. Moreover, although the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as being executed when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, and a set value change end notification command is received. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of these hot start notification commands, cold start notification commands, setting value confirmation end notification commands, and setting value change end notification commands may be received even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. You may provide the command which does not perform starting alerting | reporting.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, activation notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of activation notification and the combination of decorative symbols may all differ depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or only a part of them may be the same.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated by a setting change state, or activated by a setting confirmation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or in a setting confirmation state, the start notification is performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a power-off detection process (207SGS432). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIG. 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. (207SGS441). When there is no power-off signal input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated. When there is a power-off signal input (207SGS441; Y), the set value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are stored. The backup data to be included is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, check data used when restoring the backup data is created and stored in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), and then the process shifts to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is disconnected.

  Returning to FIG. 8-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag in accordance with the received effect control command (command analysis process: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 8-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (207SGS435) for updating a counter value for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, an player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving input of player information, and a game A player information output process (207SGS437) for outputting player information and an effect information aggregating process (207SGS438) for adding effect information are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B (password generated in an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player can access the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password, and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for effect control updates and stores the number of changes, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as player information stored each time the change display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. After the display of the two-dimensional code, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. Note that the player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, and transmits the player information accumulated in the current game to an external server, whereby a pachinko gaming machine The accumulated player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of changes, the number of jackpots, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information every time the variable display, jackpot game, and super reach are executed. To do.

  Next, the effect control process process in the characteristic part 207SG of this Embodiment is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 8-35, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetch restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the prefetch restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451; Y), after performing the prefetch notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. This process is executed.

  Further, when the value of the prefetch restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452). ). When the value of the production control process flag is “0”, “2” to “7” (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) according to the production control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetch restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 ( One of the processes is executed (see FIG. 7). As described above, by executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the feature part 207SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process on the basis of the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereby the variable display is performed four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the start winning prize determination process is performed based on the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) is not executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four fluctuation displays.

  As described above, in the feature unit 207SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game is possible in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the game is possible, the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game are set as the settings related to the game progress. The light quantity of the effect lamp 9, the setting of effects according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the factory default state.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the effect control CPU 120 has the reach effect of super reach A and super reach B as the first suggestion effect, Super Reach C and Super Reach D reach production as the second suggestion can be performed, and when Super Reach C and Super Reach D reach production are performed, Super Reach C and Super Reach D Since the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach C or the super reach D is notified from the start of the reach effect, the notification of the title 31AK007 corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 207SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, since it is notified only on the liquid crystal screen that it is in the set state, it is not possible to suitably notify that it is in the set state. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can at least perform variable display. Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated) Transition to a setting state in which settings can be made (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22)
In the setting state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state is performed on the information display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). In the case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on)
According to this feature, the information display unit that performs variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is informed that it is in a set state. Notification can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can at least perform variable display. Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the opening sensor 207SG090 are ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started) Transition to a confirmation state (for example, a state where the CPU 103 is executing the setting value confirmation processing shown in FIG.
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit performs display that can recognize the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation processing). In the case where the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on)
According to this feature, the information display unit that performs variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is informed that it is in a confirmation state. Notification can be performed.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display unit during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 and 8-27). In addition, the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derive and display the variable display result, and the display mode when the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are displayed. Different part)
According to this characteristic, it is possible to accurately recognize that the game machine is in the set state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 207SG,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the variable display unit (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). Part that lights up all the segments that make up the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, suitable notification can be performed on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be lit independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state, a display in which all the small display portions are turned on is performed (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is displayed). Part that lights up all the segments that make up)
According to this characteristic, it is possible to easily recognize that the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 6 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches a game medium into a gaming area (for example, the left gaming area 207SG002L and the right gaming area 207SG002R) and plays a game,
The information display unit includes a firing direction notifying unit (for example, a right-handed lamp 207SG132) for notifying the firing direction of the game medium in the gaming area,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), (The part where the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks in the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, a suitable notification can be performed in the launch direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A holding storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information relating to variable display as holding information,
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display unit 207SG025A and a second hold display unit 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is performed on the hold display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), (Part for blinking all segments constituting the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine having the above characteristics is described, and according to this characteristic, suitable notification can be performed in the hold display section.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
A special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state in the advantageous state;
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round indicator 207SG131) that notifies the number of times that the special variable device enters the first state in the advantageous state,
In the setting state or the confirmation state, a display that can recognize the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), (The part in which only one segment is lit among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the frequency notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game;
A detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on;
State information storage means (for example, the area of the address F002 in the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, RAM clear flag) that can identify the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means;
With
The game control means includes
A first condition (for example, a state where the clear switch is ON) is established, including that the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, a state where the clear switch is ON). When the game information is being erased, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanying the erasure of the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 8-21 (A)) is performed. Is feasible,
A second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON, and the lock switch is in a state where the state of the gaming machine detected by the detecting means is a special state (for example, a state where the clear switch is ON)) 207SG051 and open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial process executed when the first condition is satisfied An initialization process common to the initialization process can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a part capable of executing a RAM clear process and a set value change process)
The state information is not erased regardless of which of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). Not part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is established and when the second condition is established. While preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing, the initialization process based on the state information can be accurately executed.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 208SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that it cannot be suitably left that a predetermined error has occurred in the set state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
With
An information display unit (for example, a game information display) including a variable display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device 207SG004A and a second special symbol display device 207SG004B) that is controlled by the game control means and can at least perform variable display. Part 207SG200),
When the specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the release sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated) Transition to a setting state in which settings can be made (for example, a state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value change process shown in FIG. 8-22)
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, display that can specify that the predetermined error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B)). In the case where an error more than the set value occurs, the part that makes all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blink)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in a variable display area where variable display, which is an important display in a gaming machine, is executed. Since it is notified by display, it is possible to suitably notify that a predetermined error has occurred although the specific condition is satisfied.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the predetermined error is an error relating to at least a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error of a set value or more). It is possible to suitably notify that an error relating to the storage area in which is stored occurs and the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If a power interruption occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is confirmed, an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored has occurred at the time of recovery from the power interruption. Even if not, a display that can specify that an error has occurred is performed in the variable display area (for example, the first special symbol even in the case of returning from the power interruption during the setting change as shown in FIG. 287 (B)). (Part for blinking all segments constituting the display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to reset the set value because a power failure occurred before the set value was confirmed without providing a new error. This can be suitably reported.

The present embodiment also includes the following invention 209SG. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a setting value changing function, for example, there is one described in JP 2010-200902 A. Further, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with information display means capable of displaying predetermined information related to a given game value, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit and information display means for confirming the set value However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in the means 1 of the invention 209SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be played using game media and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6 as setting values) (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 8-22) ,
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means;
Game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first start winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a big winning opening, etc. The part where the prize ball is paid out)
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and the predetermined information (for example, the base shown in FIG. Value) information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029),
With
The information display means can display setting value information that can specify the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, a pachinko game). If the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state)
The number of the display units used is different between the case where the predetermined information is displayed and the case where the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit (The part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, the setting value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information relating to the gaming value. Therefore, a display means for displaying the setting value information is provided. There is no need to provide it separately, and the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means can display error information that can specify that an error relating to at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored has occurred (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), In the case where a set value abnormality error has occurred, “E.” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D).
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-25 (A) and FIG. 8-26 (B)). As shown in FIG. 5, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are both displayed when the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 and when an abnormal error is displayed. Part using part 207SG029D)
According to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error relating to the storage area in which the setting value is stored has occurred, and the error information is different from the setting value information. Can be easily recognized.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display unit includes a plurality of small display units that can be lit independently (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D each have 8 Segment)),
It has a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
If the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, that the clear switch is ON), the information display means is configured to display the small information that constitutes each display unit. All the display units are lit up and turned on (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, the fourth display unit). 207SG029D All the segments that make up and turn off all parts (flashing part))
According to this feature, it can be confirmed whether or not all of the small display portions are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 4 of invention 209SG,
It has a detection means (for example, a clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at the time of power-on detected by the detection unit satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display unit displays the set value information without being in the full lighting display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 8-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation process, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed and the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this characteristic, the set value can be quickly confirmed.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 207SG in the present embodiment has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention can be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Included in the invention.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200 is replaced with a first special symbol display device 207SG004A, a second special symbol display device 207SG004B, a first hold indicator 207SG025A, a second hold indicator 207SG025B, Although the example comprised from the symbol display 207SG020, the universal figure hold display 207SG025C, the round display 207SG131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time-shortening lamp 207SG134 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The game information display unit 207SG200 may include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  In the feature unit 207SG of the embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the case where the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). Although the example which makes 1 special symbol display apparatus 207SG004A and 2nd special symbol display apparatus 207SG004B light in the same aspect was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, CPU103 is performing setting value change processing The first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be lit or blinked in different manners depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation process is being performed. By doing in this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state by the lighting mode or the flashing mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. It is possible to inform easily whether there is.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are turned on by lighting all the segments. The display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode (lights up) of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state. Aspect) is the first special symbol display device 207S. If the 004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is different from the display mode in the case where the variable display result is derived and displayed, out of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B Some segments need not be lit.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all segments and the round display unit 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. Illustrated is a mode in which one segment is turned on, all the segments constituting the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are flashed, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, the lighting of one segment constituting the round indicator 207SG131, the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are configured. Of all segments The dark, not executed, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 is lit. Is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 8-6, the number of lighting of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is plural. There may be.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, an example in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is performed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is illustrated. For example, an error notification LED may be provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 individually, and the LED may be lit or blinked to notify that a set value abnormality error has occurred.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 207SG of the said embodiment, although the form provided with the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying a base value on the pachinko game machine 1 was illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, The pachinko game The machine 1 may not include the display monitor 207SG029. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. .

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, when the change of the setting value or the confirmation of the setting value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process is performed. Although an example of determining whether to execute is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether to execute a new first movable body initialization process or second movable body initialization process, It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body or the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round indicator 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are illustrated in a mode different from that in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed of the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state. Is not limited to this, but the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the round display that constitute the game information display unit 207SG200. Vessel 2 7SG0131, the like right-handed lamp 207SG132, may have a structure in which pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the notification if during the game that the setting value is changed status and settings confirmation state (lit or flashing).

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round indicator 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, and the like are illustrated in a mode different from that in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is informed of the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state. Is not limited to this, and the “mode different from that during the game” may include that the blinking cycle is different, the luminance, the emission color of each segment is different, and the like.

  In addition, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command. As an example of the process, the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start notification. From the time when the command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. The actual operation check operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold indicator 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display unit 207SG200, Although the round indicator 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are turned on or blinked to illustrate that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the present invention is limited to this. 1st special symbol display device 207SG004A, second special symbol display device 207SG004B, first hold indicator 207SG025A, second hold indicator when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or set value confirmation state 207SG025B, Lau De indicator 207SG131, may be provided with written description of the lighting or blinking of the right-handed light 207SG132 is executed at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (e.g., the vicinity of the gaming information display unit 207SG200). By doing in this way, a store clerk or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 can use the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold. It can be prevented that the lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, or the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is mistaken as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like.

  In the game control main process of the feature 207SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or the setting value is being changed in 207SGSa021. The mode of executing the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) after clearing the flag is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear process If it is determined in 207SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 207SGSa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (20 SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9A is a control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15. These control commands are presentation control commands transmitted and received as, for example, electrical signals.

  FIG. 9-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature part 211SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 9-1 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  Command 8CXXH is a change display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a change display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), a determination result (predetermined result) whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. ) Or different EXT data is set in accordance with a determination result (a jackpot type determination result) as to which of a plurality of jackpot types when the variation display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit D”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating stoppage (decision) of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time reduction control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and the command 9501H is a gaming state in which time reduction control is performed (high base state) , The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the short time state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) designation command that designates the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormality) has been determined on the production control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set in accordance with the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning mouth opening notification command and the big winning mouth opening notification command, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state (for example, “1” to “15”). Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type (probability variation, non-probability variation or sudden probability) as the determination result at the time of winning. The command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of “non-reach”, “super-reach”, or “other” as a determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

  The command C7XXH is a cycle determination value for notifying the value of the cycle determination counter for executing variation display with the variation pattern of the super reach α every predetermined cycle (the variation display result is lost a predetermined number of times) to be described later. This is a notification command.

  The command C8XXH is a scenario data notification command for notifying which scenario data has been set at the end timing of the jackpot game to be described later. The scenario data refers to data in which a plurality of values set in a cycle determination counter described later are collected.

  The command C9XXH is a background image designation command for designating a background image to be displayed on the image display device 5.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9B, in the characteristic part 211SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the normal display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  FIG. 9-3 shows a variation pattern in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment. In the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. Also, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is “big hit”. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variation display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach lose variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided.However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, like super reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 9-3, the special reach variation pattern of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach reach effect is executed in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment is represented by super reach α and super reach β that are super reach variation patterns. Is set shorter. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach β is executed However, the special figure variation time is set longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach production of the super reach α is executed.

  Note that, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as described above, since the variation display result is “big hit” in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, the big hit expectation is set high. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the big hit expectation degree is higher as the fluctuation time is longer.

  Note that, in the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these variation patterns are classified into the variation patterns such as the non-reach type, the normal reach type, the super reach type, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after the determination first, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and these variations are determined. The variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after first determining the variation pattern type from the random number for pattern type determination It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 to 9-7 and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. The ROM 101 also has table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variation display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (not shown), a big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4, and a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B). 9-7 (C), a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. , An ordinary map variation pattern determination table (not shown) and the like are included.

  The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment, the common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability state), a larger number of determination values than the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) is a special figure of “big hit” Assigned to display results. As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as the “big hit” in the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) to control the big hit gaming state. Then, compared to the determined probability (1/300 in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment), the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlling the big hit gaming state is higher (this embodiment) 1/150 in the characteristic part 211SG). That is, in the display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), there is a probability that it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state as compared to the normal state or the short time state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state so as to increase.

  In addition, in the display result determination table, determination values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlling to the small hit gaming state is the same regardless of the gaming state. . Specifically, regardless of the gaming state and the set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlling the small hit gaming state is set to 1/200.

  That is, when the value of MR1 coincides with any hit determination value corresponding to the big hit, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit D). Further, when MR1 matches any hit determination value corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. However, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, but stop in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  Further, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination table, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table May be provided separately to determine whether the variation display result is a big hit or not.

  FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101.

  The big hit type determination table is one of the big hit types A to D based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, big hit A and big hit B (also referred to as non-probable change big hit) in which only the time-shortening control is executed after the big hit gaming state is finished and the low-accuracy high-base state is entered. A big hit D and big hit E (also called a probable big hit) are set in which the high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control are executed after the big hit game is finished to shift to the high-accuracy high-base state.

  The big hit gaming state by “hit A” and “hit B” is a normal open big hit in which the round that changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated five times (so-called five rounds). In other words, the big hit game state by “big hit C” is a normally open big hit in which the round for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). The big hit gaming state by “big hit D” is a normally open big hit in which the round for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated 15 times (so-called 15 rounds).

  The number of time-short controls executed after the end of the big hit gaming state by the “hit A” and “hit B” (the number of fluctuations in which the short-time control is performed) varies depending on the gaming state in which the big hit has occurred. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low base state, if the variation display result is a big hit and the big hit type is determined as “big hit A” or “big hit B”, 50 times after the end of the big hit gaming state The special figure game (variable display) is executed, or the game is ended by entering the big hit game state before the 50 special figure games are executed. In addition, when the gaming state is a high base state, if the variable display result is a big hit, and the big hit type is determined to be “big hit A” or “big hit B”, the special hit is 100 times after the big hit gaming state ends. The game ends when the figure game (variable display) is executed or when the big hit game state is entered before the 100 special figure games are executed. In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, two big hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are provided as the big hit types, in which the number of rounds and the number of short-time control times are exactly the same. This is for setting different scenario data (described later).

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control that are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of “big hit C” or “big hit D” are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. . Therefore, when the big hit that is generated again is the big hit C or big hit D, the high-accuracy control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state is finished, so that the big hit gaming state continues without the normal state. The so-called villa state occurs.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, four types of big hit A to big hit D are illustrated as the big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is 3 You may provide below 5 types or more.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4, in the jackpot type determination table, when the variation special chart is the first special figure (first special symbol), the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. 74 is assigned to jackpot A, 75 to 149 is assigned to jackpot B, and 149 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure (second special symbol), 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A in the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299, and 100 to 149. Is assigned to jackpot B, 150 to 199 is assigned to jackpot C, and 200 to 299 is assigned to jackpot D.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol or the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the rate at which only the short-time control is executed after the big hit game is the same. Also, when a big win occurs in the special symbol game of the second special symbol, the ratio of the number of rounds determined to be 15 rounds is higher than when a big hit occurs in the special symbol game of the first special symbol, The percentage that the number is determined to be 5 rounds is low. That is, when the fluctuation special symbol is the second special symbol, the payout rate is higher than when the fluctuation special symbol is the first special symbol.

  In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is: You may determine using MR1 which is a random value for special figure display result determination.

  The ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. The variation pattern is selected from among the above-described plural types according to the predetermined determination result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the fluctuation display result is “small hit”. Are prepared in advance, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “lost”. ing.

  In the big hit variation pattern determination table, variation patterns of normal reach big hit variation pattern (PB1-1), super reach α big hit variation pattern (PB1-2), and super reach β big hit variation pattern (PB1-3) are included. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and 9-6 (B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table used when the big hit type is big hit A or big hit B. A big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit D and big hit E) that is used when the big hit type is big hit C or big hit D is prepared in advance. The pattern determination table (for big hit A, big hit B, big hit C) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hit (for big hit D, big hit E) have fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hit (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hit (PB1-2), variation pattern determination for each variation pattern of variation pattern (PB1-3) per super reach β jackpot A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range that the random number value MR3 can take.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), in the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table (for big hit A and big hit B), the range from 1 to 997 of the MR3 judgment value ranges from 1 to 400 for fluctuations in normal reach big hit. Is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 85 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern (PB1- Assigned to 3).

  As shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit C and big hit D), 1 to 200 in the range 3 to 997 of the MR3 determination value are fluctuations per normal reach big hit. Is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) per super reach α big, and 551 to 997 are the fluctuation pattern (PB1- Assigned to 3).

  Thus, when the big hit A or big hit B is won in the special figure game, the ratio for determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. It is higher than the rate to decide. Further, when the big hit C or big hit D is won in the special figure game, the ratio for determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) for the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) for the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the rate.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when these determination values are “big hit C” or “big hit D” in which the big hit type is a probable big hit, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is indeterminate. In the case of “hit A” or “hit B”, which is a big hit, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, and when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the “big hit C” And a player's expectation that it will be a “big hit D”.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random value out of a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern of the variation pattern (PC1-1) for small hits is a determination value. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, 0 to 997 out of the MR3 determination value range 0 to 997 are small hit variation patterns ( Assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the small hit variation pattern. Also good.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the variation pattern determination table for losing is for losing that is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in a low base state in which the gaming state is not subjected to the time reduction control. Fluctuation pattern determination table A, loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved memories is 2 to 4 in the low base state, and total number of reserved memories 5 to 8 in the low base state Loss variation pattern determination table C used in certain cases, loss variation pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time-shortening control is performed, and variation display of a predetermined number of times The variation pattern determination table E for loss used when the fluctuation display is a predetermined periodic fluctuation every time it is executed, and the fluctuation display is four times before and after the predetermined cyclic fluctuation. A loss for the variation pattern determination table F used when a dynamic display, but are prepared in advance. In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is intended for the number of fluctuations (the number of times the fluctuation display result is lost) except that the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. The present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined period may include the number of times of fluctuation when the fluctuation display result is a small hit.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without reduction, the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super reach. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of β loss in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. Also, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to 2 to 4 combined pending storage numbers. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the loss and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. Yes. Also, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α corresponding to the total number of pending storages of 5 to 8. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value in a range that can be taken by the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the loss and the variation pattern (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 9-3, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach loss variation. The non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter variation time than the pattern (PA1-2). Therefore, when the total number of pending storage increases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss that has a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the pending storage is easily digested, and the number of pending storage reaches the upper limit number. By making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not reserved, and when the number of reserved memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1- By determining 1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed by increasing the time of the variable display.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2) during the time-shortening control. A predetermined random value is assigned as a determination value to the variation range (PA2-3) of the super reach β loss in a range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table E for losing, all random values in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the variation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss are assigned as determination values. It has been. That is, in the predetermined period variation in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, if the variation display result is lost, the variation display is always executed with the variation pattern of the super reach α loss. The invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a predetermined period variation, there may be provided a case in which the variation display is executed with a variation pattern of super reach β loss.

  In addition, in the predetermined period variation of the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation display is always executed with a variation pattern of the super reach α loss. The invention is not limited to this, and in a predetermined cycle variation, the variation pattern may be determined by lottery from the variation pattern of normal reach and super reach. Furthermore, when the variation pattern of the predetermined cycle variation is determined by lottery from a plurality of variation patterns in this way, the proportion varies depending on the remaining number of times of repeating the predetermined number of variation displays (the value of the remaining loop number counter described later). The variation pattern may be determined. For example, even if the value of the remaining loop number counter, which will be described later, is an even value and an odd value, the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern having a long special figure fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β) may be varied. Alternatively, each time the value of a remaining loop number counter, which will be described later, decreases (a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are repeatedly executed), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern having a long special figure fluctuation time may be increased or decreased.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table E for losing, all random numbers in the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach losing variation pattern (PA1-2) are assigned as determination values. Yes. That is, in the four fluctuations before and after the predetermined periodic fluctuation in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation display result of the four fluctuations before and after the predetermined cyclic fluctuation is lost, the fluctuation display is always non-reach loss (PA1-2). It is designed to be executed with the fluctuation pattern.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, for example, a game control data holding area 211SG150 as shown in FIG. 9-8 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game. It has been. The game control data holding area 211SG150 shown in FIG. 9-8 includes a first special figure storage unit 211SG151A, a second special figure storage unit 211SG151B, a general figure storage unit 211SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 211SG152, and the like. The game control timer setting unit 211SG153, the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A has a start winning (first start winning) that has passed since the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, but has not started yet. The holding data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 211SG151A associates the holding number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The reserved data includes the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure storage unit 211SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of the result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

  The second special figure storage unit 211SG151B has not started yet although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The holding data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The reserved data includes the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 211SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is being held, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. On the basis of the result), it becomes the hold information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to make a big hit.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The general figure holding storage unit 211SG151C stores the holding information of the general game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 211SG151C associates with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The game control flag setting unit 211SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 211SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. The game control timer setting unit 211SG153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 211SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 211SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 211SG154 determines a cycle determination counter for making it possible to determine whether or not the variation display is a predetermined cycle variation, and the number of times that the variation display is repeated a predetermined number of times (the number of remaining loops). Data indicating a remaining loop number counter or the like for enabling is stored. Note that the game control counter setting unit 211SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that it can be updated by software. In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 holds, for example, effect control data as shown in FIG. 9-9 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. An area 211SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 211SG190 shown in FIG. 9-9A includes an effect control flag setting unit 211SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 211SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 211SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 211SG194. I have. In the effect control flag setting unit 211SG191, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the screen of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 211SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. The effect control timer setting unit 211SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, a display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 211SG192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. The effect control counter setting unit 211SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 211SG193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. The effect control buffer setting unit 211SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 211SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In characteristic section 211SG of the present embodiment, data constituting start winning prize reception command buffer 211SG194A as shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of effect control buffer setting section 211SG194. In the reception command buffer 211SG194A at the time of the start winning prize, the storage area (buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the first special figure reserved memory is stored. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure during the variable display (an area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”). In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers “2-1” to “2-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total reserved memory number of the second special figure reserved memory is stored. ) And a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during the variable display. When there is a starting prize at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening, a starting opening prize designation command (first starting slot prize designation command or second starting slot prize designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A command and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as a cycle determination value notification command. The The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold memory in the reception command buffer 211SG194A at the time of the start winning prize include these start opening prize designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is stored for associating the reserved memory count notification command and the cycle determination value notification command in association with the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory.

  The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the uppermost reserved storage (buffer number “1-1” or buffer number “2-1”) is started. The contents of the buffer number “1-0” or the buffer number “2-0” for storing the contents of the pending storage satisfying the start condition are displayed in the fluctuation display. It is cleared in the decorative symbol variation stop process executed when ending.

  Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A of this embodiment, the determination of the display pattern accompanying the determination of whether or not to execute the hold display notification effect is not yet determined in the pre-read notification setting process (FIG. 9-24) described later. Displayed by whether or not there is a new start winning, that is, a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, a reserved memory number notification command, and a cycle judgment value notification command are newly stored. A display undecided flag indicating that the pattern has not been decided, and a hold display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold memory display is set are stored in the first special figure hold memory and the first 2 A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the special figure hold storage. In the hold display flag, “0” corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the prefetch notice setting determination process described later. Thus, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D and the second hold storage display area 211SG005U, and execution of the hold display notice effect is determined. Includes “1” (square (◇)) or “2” (star) corresponding to the display pattern of the reserved storage display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (☆)) is set, the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 211SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 211SG00. Is displayed on the U, the variable display corresponding to the hold store display, it is adapted to be subject likely to be a potential or super reach as a jackpot.

  The first reserved memory display area 211SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 211SG005U in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment can specify the number of reserved memories of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game (number of special figure reserved memories). This is an area (area) where the hold storage display is displayed, and is provided at the lower part of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 9-27).

  The production control CPU 120 stores the command from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold memory of the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 211SG194A. Go. At the time of a start winning, a start opening winning designation command to a cycle judgment value notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if a command is received, the start opening prize designation command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the tails “1” to “4” of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure hold memory or the second special figure hold memory. The symbol designation command, the variation category designation command, the pending storage number notification command, and the cycle judgment value notification command are stored in this order.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A shown in FIG. 9-9 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the suspended display of the variation display that ended immediately before the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The entry stored in the number “1-0” or “2-0”) is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the starting variable display pending storage (buffer number “1-1” or “2”) is deleted. Stored in the entry corresponding to -1 "and the stored contents of the entry after the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 9-9 (B), when the variable display of the decorative pattern in the first special figure hold memory is finished, each command stored in the buffer number “0” is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in “1” is shifted to the buffer number “0”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number “2” is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”. The shifted commands stored in the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “3” and “4” are shifted to the areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “2” and “3”. Therefore, the buffer number “0” is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

  Next, each process in the special symbol process in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first sets the first start port switch 22A based on a detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning port formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not it is on (211 SGS100). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is ON (211 SGS100; Y), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is “4”) (211 SGS101). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154. When the first special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in 211SGSS101 (211SGS101; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is set to “1” (211SGS102) .

  When the first start opening switch 22A is off at 211 SGS100 (211 SGS100; N), or when the first special figure reserved memory number reaches the upper limit at 211 SGS101 (211 SGS101; Y), the variable winning ball apparatus 6B Whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on is determined based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by (211 SGS103). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (211 SGS103; Y), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value ( For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is “4”) (211 SGS104). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, for example. When the second special figure reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in 211 SGS104 (211 SGS104; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is set to “2” (211 SGS105) .

  After either of the processes of 211SGS102 and 211SGS105 is executed, the special figure holding memory number corresponding to the start port buffer value which is the stored value of the start port buffer is updated by 1 (211 SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storage is updated so as to add 1 (211 SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 211SG154, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

  After executing the processing of 211SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 211SG154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (211 SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (211 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure storage unit 211SG151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type determine whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, Is used to determine the jackpot type when the variation display result is “big hit”. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 211 SGS 109 to extract numerical data indicating all of the random values used for the determination of the variation display mode including the variation display result and the variation display time of the special symbol and the decoration symbol.

  Subsequent to the processing of 211 SGS110, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (211 SGS111). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  Subsequent to the processing of 211 SGS 111, a winning random number determination processing is executed (211 SGS 112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (211 SGS114). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  After executing the process of 211SGS114, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is “1” (211SGS115). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (211 SGS115; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to “0” (211 SGS 216), and the process proceeds to 211 SGS 103. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (211 SGS115; N), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (211 SGS117), and then the start winning determination process. Exit. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 9-11 (A) is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed by 211SGS112 in FIG. 9-10 as the winning random number determination processing. In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (the variation display result of the special symbol) is performed by a special symbol normal process (see FIG. 9-13) described later. ) Is determined to be a big hit game state as a “big hit”, and whether or not the special figure display result (variable display result of special symbols) is set to “small hit” to control the small hit game state is determined. . Also, in a variation pattern setting process (see FIGS. 9-14) described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines a variation display mode of a decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, separately from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), It is determined whether or not it is determined that a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol display result, or whether or not the decorative symbol variation display mode is a predetermined display mode with super reach. Thereby, before starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative design based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening, that is, rather than determining whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display Before, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be “big hit” or “small hit”, and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, As will be described later, the hold display notice effect is executed by the control CPU 120 or the like.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time-short flag or a probability change flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 211SG152, etc. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (S211SG121). The CPU 103 identifies the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

  Subsequent to the processing of 211SGS121, the display result determination table is selected and set (211SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted in 211SGS109 of FIG. 9-10 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (211SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit” and “small hit” in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 211 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets a random value MR1. It is only necessary to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing each determination value one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the big hit determination range or the small hit determination range, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the big hit determination range or the small hit value. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the big hit determination range or the small hit determination range by comparing the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination range. At this time, when the random value MR1 is determined to be within the range of the big hit determination range or the small hit determination range, the fluctuation display result based on the pending data including the random value MR1 becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. It can be determined that it is determined.

  When it is determined that it is not within the big hit determination range at 211 SGS123, that is, when it is determined that it will not be a big hit at the time of variable display (211 SGS123; N), the special figure display extracted at 211 SGS109 of FIGS. 9-10 It is determined whether or not numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for result determination is within a predetermined small hit determination range (211 SGS123a). When it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range in 211 SGS123a, that is, when it is determined that the small display is not hit for the variable display (211 SGS123a; N), the variable display result is “lost”. The symbol designation command transmission setting is executed (122SGS124). The symbol designating command corresponding to the loss thus set is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted. Then, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a time reduction state (211 SGS125). When the time reduction flag is not set (211 SGS125; N), the variation pattern determination table A for loss shown in FIG. 9-7 (A) is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is set (211 SGS125; Y), the variation pattern determination table D for loss shown in FIG. 9-7 (D) is selected and set (211 SGS127).

  The loss variation pattern determination table A is a loss variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less. Further, the loss variation pattern determination table D is a loss variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time-shortening control is executed.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of this embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern determination table A for loss and the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the loss used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. For example, a variation pattern determination table B for loss and a variation pattern determination table C for loss used when the total number of reserved memories is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. Among the variation pattern determination tables A to D, the variation pattern determination table A for losing assigns values from 1 to 450 out of the possible range of the variation pattern determination random value MR3 for the non-reach variation pattern. In the variation pattern determination tables B and C for loss, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used for the non-reach variation pattern. Value greater than 1 to 500 within the range are assigned. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  For this reason, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss in 211 SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super-reach is always made by non-reach or super-reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it becomes a variation pattern, the determination at the time of starting winning is made using the variation pattern determination table A for loss.

  As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), when it is determined in 211SGS123 that it is within the big hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that it will be a big hit during variable display (211 SGS123; Y), the big hit type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for use (S128). At this time, the CPU 103 responds according to the fluctuation special figure corresponding to the start port buffer value ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2"). The big hit type determination table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined whether the jackpot type is determined as a plurality of types.

  Moreover, the transmission setting of the symbol designation | designated command according to the jackpot classification determined in 211SGS128 is performed (211SGS129). The symbol designation command corresponding to the jackpot set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted. Then, the big hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table for determining the big hit variation pattern as one of a plurality (211 SGS130).

  Furthermore, when it is determined in 211 SGS124 that it is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that it will be a small hit at the time of variable display (211 SGS124; Y), the transmission setting of the symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit (211 SGS131a). The symbol designation command corresponding to the small hits set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process is completed. Are transmitted. Then, the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table for determining the small hit variation pattern (211 SGS131b).

  After executing any of the processes of 211SGS126, 211SGS127, 211SGS130, and 211SGS131b, numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination table set in the process of 211SGS126, 211SGS127, 211SGS130, and 211SGS131 and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination Is used to determine the variation category corresponding to the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 (211 SGS132). In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), when at least the fluctuation display result is “lost”, the “non-reach” is commonly used regardless of the total number of reserved storage. The fluctuation category that becomes the fluctuation display mode, the fluctuation category that becomes the fluctuation display mode of “Super Reach”, and the “Other” that becomes the fluctuation display mode other than “Non-reach” and “Super Reach” (for example, normal reach and small hits) It is only necessary to provide a variation category and determine whether or not to determine such a variation category based on the random value MR3.

  Then, the setting for transmitting the change category designation | designated command according to the determination result by the process of 211SGS132 with respect to the production | presentation control board 12 is performed (211 SGS133). Then, the value of the cycle determination counter is specified (211 SGS134), and it is determined whether any one of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211 SGS135). Although details will be described later, the state in which any numerical value of 0 to 128 is set in the period determination counter in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. (When the power is turned on while the clear switch is operated), it indicates that it has been controlled to be in a time-saving state at least once (because it has been through a big hit gaming state with a non-probable big hit). Further, the state in which the period determination counter is set to 0 means that the predetermined period variation display of the predetermined number of times (the same number as the initial value set in the remaining loop number counter) has already been completed, and then the time-short state is controlled. It is shown that the predetermined cycle fluctuation display is not executed until the time is reached.

  When any value of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211 SGS135; Y), a cycle determination value notification command corresponding to the value of the cycle determination counter and the gaming state is sent to the effect control board 12. Then, the setting for transmission is made (211 SGS136), and the winning random number determination process is terminated. Further, when any value of 1 to 128 is not set in the period determination counter (211 SGS135; N), that is, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not yet been controlled to be in the time-saving state. If the predetermined cycle variation display is not executed until the next time-short state control, it is assumed that “128” is set to the value of the cycle determination counter. 128 is set to transmit a period determination value notification command corresponding to “128” to the effect control board 12 (211 SGS137), and the random number determination process at the time of winning is completed.

  The period determination value notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is done.

  In addition, the numerical value of the period determination value notification command that the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control board 12 in 211SGS136 and 211SGS137 differs depending on the gaming state. That is, as shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), when the gaming state is the low base state, the CPU 103 sets the value obtained by subtracting 5 from the value of the cycle determination counter as the value of the cycle determination value notification command. If the gaming state is the high base state, transmission setting is performed using a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the cycle determination counter as the value of the cycle determination value notification command.

  When the value obtained by subtracting 5 from the value of the cycle determination counter in the low base state becomes a negative value (any one of −1 to −4), the CPU 103 reduces the minus amount to the next cycle determination counter. Transmission setting is performed using a value obtained by subtracting from an initial value (a value set as an initial value of the next cycle in scenario data described later) as a value of a cycle determination value notification command.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 211SG in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-10 and the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-11 (A). Every time a winning occurs, a start winning mouth designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category designation command, a reserved memory number notification command, and a cycle judgment value notification command are transmitted to the effect control board 12, and these commands are received at the time of the start winning prize. It is stored in the corresponding entry of the command buffer 211SG194A.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B), regarding the period judgment value notification command among these commands, when 1 start prize is generated during each variation display, If a start determination prize is generated a plurality of times during the display of one variation while a cycle determination value notification command with different values is transmitted to the effect control board 12, a random number value determination at the time of winning is made based on each start prize The process is executed, and a cycle determination value notification command indicating the same value is transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 9-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (211 SGS141). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the processing of 211 SGS 141, the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 211 SG 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in 211 SGS141 (211 SGS141; N), the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B stores the reservation data corresponding to the reservation number “1”. Then, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (211 SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of 211 SGS142, the second special figure reserved memory number count value and the total reserved memory number count value are decremented by one and updated, and the second special figure reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are decremented by one. And the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 211SG151B are updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit 211SG151B are stored. The pending data shown is shifted up by one entry (211 SGS143).

  Thereafter, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “2” (211 SGS144), and then the process proceeds to 211 SGS149.

  On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation storage number is “0” in 211 SGS141 (211 SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reservation storage number is “0” (211 SGS145). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the processing of 211 SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 211SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. Good. As described above, the processing of 211SGS145 is executed when it is determined in 211SGS141 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. Determine whether. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special game using the second special figure is not limited to a game executed with priority over the special graphic game using the first special figure. The execution of the special game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winnings are generated. In this case, a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be able to decide.

  In 211 SGS145, when the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” (211 SGS145; N), the first special figure storage unit 211SG151A stores the hold data corresponding to the hold number “1”. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out (211 SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of 211 SGS146, the first special figure reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are decremented by one by updating the first special figure reserved memory count count value or the total reserved memory count count value by one. In addition, the data in the first special figure storage unit 211SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure holding storage unit 211SG151A are stored. The pending data shown is shifted up by one entry (211 SGS147).

  After that, the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “1” (211 SGS148), and then the process proceeds to 211 SGS149.

  In 211 SGS149, the above-mentioned display result determination table is used as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variation display result of the special symbol, is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. Select and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number MR1 stored in the fluctuation random number buffer is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. Compared with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost” (211 SGS150). In the 211 SGS150, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is set, for example, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is 1020 to 1079, 13320. If it falls within the range of ~ 13757, it is judged as “big hit”, if it falls within the range of 32767 to 33094, it is judged as “small hit”, and if not, it is judged as “lost”. Further, if the probability variation flag is not set (normal state or time-short state), for example, if the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1020 to 1237, “big hit” is determined. If it falls within the range of 32767 to 33094, it is judged as “small hit”, and if not, it is judged as “lost”.

  Thus, in the special figure display result determination table selected in 211SGS149, since different determination values are assigned to “big hit” corresponding to the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), 211SGS150 In this process, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the gaming state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is a high probability state. In the case where the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined as a “big hit” with a higher probability than in the case where the gaming state is a low probability state.

  After the special figure display result is determined in 211 SGS150, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (211 SGS151). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (211 SGS151; Y), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 211SG152 is set to the on state (211 SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4 is selected and set as a use table for determining any one of a plurality of jackpot types (211 SGS153). By referring to the big hit type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation, and each big hit type from big hit A to big hit E in the big hit type determination table The jackpot type is determined as a plurality of types in accordance with which of the determination values assigned to (211 SGS154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of 211 SGS154, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends in any of the short-time state and the probable state that is more advantageous to the player than the short-time state. Whether to control is decided before the definite special symbol as the variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 (211 SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is big hit A, the big hit type buffer value is “0”, if the big hit type is big hit B, the big hit type buffer value is “1”, and if the big hit type is big hit C, the big hit type buffer If the value is “2” and the jackpot type is jackpot D, the jackpot type buffer value may be “3”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in 211 SGS151 that it is not “big hit” (211 SGS151; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (211 SGS156). If it is determined that the game is “small hit” (211 SGS156; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 211SG152 is set to the on state (211 SGS157).

  When the special figure display result is not “small hit” (211 SGS156; N), after execution of 211 SGS155 and 211 SGS157, a confirmed special symbol is determined (211 SGS158). For example, a special symbol indicating a lost symbol is set as a confirmed special symbol in response to a pre-determined result indicating that the special symbol display result is “lost”. If the special symbol display result is determined to be “big hit” in 211 SGS 151, one of the special symbols indicating the big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type in 211 SGS 154. To do. If it is determined in 211 SGS156 that the special symbol display result is “small hit”, one of the special symbols indicating the small bonus symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in 211 SGS158, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting processing (211 SGS159), and then the special symbol normal processing is terminated.

  In addition, when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” in 211 SGS145 (211 SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (211 SGS161), the special symbol normal End the process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 9-14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (211 SGS171). If the big hit flag is on (211 SGS171; Y), the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type is selected and set as a use table for determining any of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns ( 211 SGS172).

  When the big hit flag is OFF in 211 SGS171 (211 SGS171; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (211SG173). When the small hit flag is ON (211 SGS173; Y), the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (211 SGS174).

  When the small hit flag is OFF in 211SGS173 (211SG173; N), it is determined whether any value of 1 to 128 is set in the period determination counter (211SGS175). When any value of 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (122SGS175; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the remaining loop number counter value is already 0 (211SGS176). If the value of the remaining loop counter is not 0, that is, if the predetermined cycle variation display is still possible (211 SGS176; N), whether or not the value of the cycle determination counter is any one of 1 to 4 Is determined (211 SGS177).

  When the value of the cycle determination counter is not any of 1 to 4 (211 SGS177; N), it is determined whether the value of the cycle determination counter is any of 6 to 9 (211 SGS178). When the value of the cycle determination counter is 1 to 4 (211 SGS177; Y) or when the value of the cycle determination counter is 6 to 9 (211 SGS178; Y), the variation pattern determination for loss The table F is selected and set (211 SGS179).

  When the value of the cycle determination counter is not any of 6 to 9 (211 SGS178; N), it is determined whether the value of the cycle determination counter is 5 (211 SGS180). When the value of the cycle determination counter is 5 (211 SGS180; Y), it is further determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set, that is, whether or not the high base state is set (211 SGS181). When the time reduction flag is not set (211 SGS181; N), the change pattern determination table E for loss is selected and set (211 SGS182), and when the time reduction flag is set (211 SGS181; Y), the change for loss The pattern determination table D is selected and set (211 SGS184).

  When none of the values for 1 to 128 is set in the cycle determination counter (211 SGS175; N), and when the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0 (211 SGS176; Y), the value of the cycle determination counter is If it is not 5 (211 SGS180; N), it is determined whether or not the hourly time flag is set (211 SGS183). When the time reduction flag is set (211 SGS183; Y), the variation pattern determination table D for loss is selected and set (211 SGS184), and when the time reduction flag is not set (211 SGS183; N), the total pending storage It is determined whether the number is 2 or more (211 SGS185).

  When the total pending storage number is 1 or less (211 SGS185; N), the loss variation pattern determination table A is selected and set (211 SGS186), and when the total pending storage number is 2 or more (211 SHS185; Y) Further, it is further determined whether or not the total pending storage number is 5 or more (211 SGS187).

  When the total pending storage number is 4 or less (211 SGS187; N), the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected and set (211 SGS188), and when the total pending storage number is 5 or more (211 SGS187; Y) Selects and sets the variation pattern determination table C for loss (211 SGS189).

  After executing any of the processes 211SGS172, 211SGSGS174, 211SGS179, 211SGS182, 211SGS184, 211SGS186, 211SGS188, 211SGS189, for example, numerical data indicating a random number MR3 for variation pattern determination stored in a random number buffer for variation, etc. Based on the above, the variation pattern is determined to any one by referring to either the selected big hit variation pattern determination table or the loss variation pattern determination tables A to F (211 SGS190).

  That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-15, when the gaming state is the low base state and the value of the period determination counter is 5, the variation pattern determination table E for loss Is set, a predetermined cycle variation display (super reach α loss variation display) is executed, and in the variation display four times before and after the predetermined cycle variation display, the variation pattern determination table F for loss is set. As a result, the fluctuation display is executed in a non-reach fluctuation pattern. Further, when the value of the cycle determination counter is 10, any one of the variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is set by setting any of the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss. Fluctuation display is executed.

  When the variation display result is lost and the value of the cycle determination counter is 5, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is set if the gaming state is the high base state, so normal reach or super reach Variation display may be executed with the variation pattern. Further, even when the variation display result is a loss and the value of the cycle determination counter is any one of 1-4 and 6-9, if the gaming state is a high base state, the variation pattern determination table D for loss is Since it is set, fluctuation display may be executed with a fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach.

  When the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol variation display mode is “reach” by determining the variation pattern in the processing of 211 SGS190. In other words, the processing of 211 SGS 190 includes processing for determining whether or not to change the variation display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variation display result is “losing”.

  Returning to FIG. 9-14, after the change pattern is determined in 211SGS190, the special game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special figure are displayed according to the variable special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the symbol display 4B (211 SGS191). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is performed.

  Following the processing of 211 SGS 191, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the change of the special symbol (211 SGS 192). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is used to set setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance. Is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a game state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 211SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance. Store in the buffer area designated by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

  After executing the process of 211SGS192, a special figure change time which is a change display time of a special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the change pattern is set (211SGS193). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the fluctuation display result (special figure display result) is derived and displayed. It is. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (211 SGS194), and then the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

  Based on the command transmission setting in 211 SGS192, each time the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variation display result designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Note that the order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted after the variation display result designation command is first transmitted. The game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command, or the second reserved memory number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 performs control to end the change of the special symbol and derive and display the stop symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B (211 SGS201). If the variation special symbol designation buffer value is “1” indicating the first special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is terminated, and the variation special symbol designation buffer value is In the case of “2” indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol indicator 4B is terminated. Moreover, control for transmitting the symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (211 SGS202). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (211 SGS203). If the big hit flag is not set (211 SGS203; N), the process proceeds to 211 SGS213.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is set (211 SGS203; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the type of the big hit is an uncertain variable big hit (big hit A or big hit B) (211 SGS204). When the type of jackpot is an uncertain variable jackpot (211 SGS204; Y), it is further determined whether or not a time reduction flag is set (211 SGS205). When the time reduction flag is set (211 SGS205; Y), the high base medium big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation display result is a big hit in the high base state (time reduction state) is set (211 SGS206).

  Further, when the big hit type is a probable big hit (211 SGS204; N), when the hourly flag is not set (211 SGS205; N), after execution of 211 SGS206, the CPU 103 determines that the probability change flag or the hourly flag is set. The probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are cleared (211 SGS207), and the big hit start 1 designation command (big hit A), the big hit start 2 designation command (big hit B), the big hit start 3 designation command ( A setting is made to transmit either the big hit C) or the big hit start 4 designation command (big hit D) to the effect control board 12 (211 SGS208).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the effect control board 12 (211 SGS209).

  Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the image display device 5 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (211 SGS210). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times for big hit A and big hit B, 10 times for big hit C, 15 times for big hit D) is set in the big prize opening number counter (211 SGS211).

  In addition, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (211 SGS212), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag can be set in 211SGS213 (211SGS213). When the small hit flag is set (211 SGS213; Y), a setting for transmitting a small hit start designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (211 SGS214).

  Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit in the image display device 5, for example) is set in the small hit display time timer (211 SGS215). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times for small hits) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (211 SGS216). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit pre-release process, and the special symbol stop process is terminated (211 SGS217).

  If the small hit flag is not set in the 211 SGS 213 (211 SGS 213; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set (211 SGS 218). When the probability change flag is set (211 SGS218; Y), the process proceeds to 211 SGS231, and when the probability change flag is not set (211 SGS218; N), it is further determined whether or not the time reduction flag is set (211 SGS219). When the time reduction flag is not set (211 SGS219; N), the process proceeds to 211 SGS223, and when the time reduction flag is set (211 SGSa219; Y), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (211 SGS220). It is determined whether or not the value of has become 0 (211 SGS221).

  When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (211 SGS221; Y), the time reduction flag is cleared and the process proceeds to 211 SGS 223 (211 SGS 222). If the value of the time counter is not 0 (211 SGS221; N), the process proceeds to 211 SGS 223 without executing the process of 211 SGS 222.

  In 211SGS223, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the period determination counter is set (211SGS223). If the period determination counter is not set, that is, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not yet been controlled to be in the short-time state after being started by a cold start (211 SGS223; N), the process proceeds to 211 SGS231, and the period determination counter Is set (211 SGS223; Y), it is determined whether or not the value set in the period determination counter is 0 (211 SGS224).

  When the value set in the period determination counter is 0 (211 SGS224; Y), the process proceeds to 211 SGS227, and when the value set in the period determination counter is not 0 (211 SGS224; N), the period determination The counter value is decremented by -1 (211 SGS225), and it is determined whether or not the value of the cycle determination counter is 0 (211 SGS226). When the value of the period determination counter becomes 0 (211 SGS226; Y), the process proceeds to 211 SGS227, and when the value of the period determination counter does not become 0 (211 SGS226; N), the process proceeds to 211 SGS230.

  In 211SGS227, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0 (211SGS227). When the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0 (211 SGS227; Y), the process proceeds to 211 SGS230, and when the value of the remaining loop number counter is not 0 (211 SGS227; N), the value of the remaining loop number counter is decremented by -1. (211 SGS228), based on the set scenario data (see FIG. 9-18), a value corresponding to the value of the remaining loop number counter is set in the period determination counter (211 SGS229), and the process proceeds to 211 SGS230.

  Although details will be described later, in the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, depending on the game type in which the big hit type and the big hit have occurred, the first period (first time) to the 14th period (14 Scenario data (scenario data A to scenario data D shown in FIG. 9-18) including the number of fluctuations corresponding to the period (number of remaining loops) is set. In the processing of 211 SGS229, it is set. A value corresponding to the value of the remaining loop counter is set in the cycle determination counter from the scenario data.

  In 211 SGS230, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the period determination value notification command (211 SGS230), and proceeds to 211 SGS231. Then, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the game state designation command in accordance with the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag in 211SGS226 (211SGS226). The game state designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. Further, the CPU 103 performs transmission setting of the background image designation command according to the state of the time flag, the period determination counter, and the remaining loop number counter (211 SGS232).

The game state designation command and the background image designation command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process and ends the special symbol stop process (211 SGS233).

  FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit end process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating (211 SGS241). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (211 SGS241; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to a time for jackpot end display in the image display device 5 (big jackpot end display time). Set (211 SGS242), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (211 SGS241; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by -1 (211 SGS243). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (211 SGS244). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (211 SGS244; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored big hit type is a probable big hit (big hit C or big hit D) (211 SGS245).

  When the big hit type is a non-probable big hit (big hit A or big hit B) (211 SGS245; N), a short time flag is set (211 SGS246), and it is determined whether the high base medium big hit flag is set (211 SGS247). . When the high base medium big hit flag is not set, that is, when the big hit is a non-probable variable big hit that occurs in the low base state (211 SGS247; N), “50” is set in the time-count counter and the process proceeds to (211 SGS250) . Further, when the high base medium big hit flag is set, that is, when the big hit is a non-probable variable big hit that occurs in the high base state (211SHS247; Y), “100” is set to the hour / count counter (211 SGS249). , 211 Go to SGS250.

  In 211 SGS250, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot A (211 SGS250). When the big hit type is big hit A (211 SGS250; Y), “14” is set in the remaining loop number counter (211 SGS251), and it is determined whether or not the high base medium big hit flag is set (211 SGS252). When the high base medium / big hit flag is not set (211 SGS252; N), the scenario data A shown in FIG. 9-18 (A) is set and the process proceeds to 211 SGS261 (211 SGS253), and the high base medium / big hit flag is set. If it is present (211 SGS252; Y), the scenario data B shown in FIG. 9-18 (B) is set and the high base medium / big hit flag is cleared and the process proceeds to 211 SGS 261 (211 SGS 254, 211 SGS 255).

  When the big hit type is the big hit B in 211 SGS250 (211 SGS250; N), “13” is set in the remaining loop number counter (211 SGS256), and it is determined whether or not the high base medium big hit flag is set ( 211 SGS257). When the high base medium big hit flag is not set (211 SGS257; N), the scenario data C shown in FIG. 9-18 (C) is set and the process proceeds to 211 SGS261 (211 SGS258), and the high base medium big hit flag is set. If it is present (211 SGS257; Y), the scenario data D shown in FIG. 9-18 (D) is set and the high base medium / big hit flag is cleared and the process proceeds to 211 SGS 261 (211 SGS 259 and 211 SGS 260).

  In 211 SGS 261, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the remaining loop number counter in the set scenario data in the cycle determination counter.

  Here, scenario data will be described. As shown in FIGS. 9-18 (A) and 9-18 (B), the scenario data A and the big hit A big hit are set when the short-time control is executed 50 times at the maximum after the big hit A big hit game is completed. The scenario data B that is set when the time-shortening control is executed 100 times at the maximum after the game is finished is scenario data for executing a predetermined cycle variation over a maximum of 14 cycles. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (C) and 9-18 (D), scenario data C and jackpot B that are set when the short-time control is executed 50 times at the maximum after the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed. The scenario data D that is set when the short-time control is executed 100 times at the maximum after the big hit game is completed is scenario data for executing a predetermined cycle variation over a maximum of 13 cycles. That is, in the characteristic part 211SG in the present embodiment, the scenario data set after the end of the jackpot game of the non-probable big hit has a different maximum cycle for executing the predetermined cycle variation according to the big hit type.

  As shown in FIG. 9-18 (A), when scenario data A is set, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the remaining loop number counter is “14” (first period) and the above-described 211 SGS261. In the process, “50”, which is the maximum number of executions of the short-time control, is set in the cycle determination counter. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets “79” to the cycle determination counter if the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (second cycle) in the above-described processing of 211 SGS229 (see FIG. 9-16). If the value of the remaining loop number counter is “12” or less (after the third period including after the value of the remaining loop number counter is “0”), “128” is set in the period determination counter.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (B), when scenario data B is set, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the remaining loop number counter is “14” (first cycle), and the above-described 211 SGS261. In the process, “100”, which is the maximum number of executions of the short-time control, is set in the cycle determination counter. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets “79” to the cycle determination counter if the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (second cycle) in the above-described processing of 211 SGS229 (see FIG. 9-16). If the value of the remaining loop number counter is “12” or less (after the third period including after the value of the remaining loop number counter is “0”), “128” is set in the period determination counter.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-18 (C), when scenario data C is set, if the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (first cycle), the CPU 103 In the process, “50”, which is the maximum number of executions of the short-time control, is set in the cycle determination counter. Thereafter, the CPU 103 includes the value after the value of the remaining loop number counter is “12” or less (after the value of the remaining loop number counter is “0”) in the process of the 211 SGS229 described above (see FIG. 9-16). If it is after the period, “128” is set in the period determination counter.

  As shown in FIG. 9-18 (D), when scenario data C is set, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the remaining loop number counter is “13” (first period) and In the process, “100”, which is the maximum number of executions of the short-time control, is set in the cycle determination counter. Thereafter, the CPU 103 includes the value after the value of the remaining loop number counter is “12” or less (after the value of the remaining loop number counter is “0”) in the process of the 211 SGS229 described above (see FIG. 9-16). If it is after the period, “128” is set in the period determination counter.

  That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (A) to 9-18 (D), the scenario data set after the big hit game of the big hit A is used for the period determination. As numerical values (number of fluctuations) that can be set in the counter, a total of four numerical values “50”, “100”, “79”, and “128” are provided in advance, and are set after the big hit game of the big hit B ends. As for the scenario data, three numerical values “50”, “100”, and “128” are provided in advance as numerical values (number of fluctuations) that can be set in the cycle determination counter.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the same value as the number of fluctuations for which the time reduction control is performed after the big hit game is finished is set in the period determination counter, and the period determination counter is generated every time a start prize is generated. Since a cycle judgment value notification command (a command including a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the cycle judgment counter; see FIG. 9-11) is transmitted, a command for notifying the remaining short time control count is individually transmitted. It is also possible to notify the effect control CPU 120 of the remaining short time control count without providing it.

  In addition, in any state where scenario data A to scenario data D are set, if the value set in the period determination counter is any one of 1 to 9 in the short-time state, FIG. 9-14 As indicated by 211 SGS 175 to 211 SGS 181, there is no case where the fluctuation display is executed only by the non-reach fluctuation pattern or the fluctuation display is always executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α.

  In other words, during the time reduction control in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the value of the cycle determination counter is subtracted and updated every time when the variation display is finished, while the value of the cycle determination counter is updated when the variation display result is lost. Regardless of whether the variation pattern is non-reach, normal reach, or super reach (the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern determination table E for loss, or the variation pattern determination table F for loss) Is not used to determine the fluctuation pattern).

  As described above, in the case where scenario data A or scenario data B is set during the big hit game ending process in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. When the display of the same number of times (50 times or 100 times) as the short-time control count is executed in the eye and the gaming state changes to the low base state, the 75th as the predetermined cycle variation among the 79 variation displays of the second cycle. The fluctuation display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α. In each period from the third cycle to the 14th cycle, out of the 128 fluctuation displays, the 124th fluctuation display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α.

  Also, when scenario data C or scenario data D is set during the big hit game ending process, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), first, the same number of times of short-time control (50 times or100) in the first cycle. ) Fluctuation display is executed and the gaming state changes to the low base state, in each cycle from the second cycle to the thirteenth cycle, out of 128 fluctuation displays, the 124th fluctuation display is super reach α. It is executed with the fluctuation pattern.

  Note that the timing at which the predetermined cycle fluctuations are executed in each cycle is an example when all the fluctuation display results are lost. That is, when the fluctuation display result is a small hit during each cycle, the timing at which the predetermined period fluctuation is executed is shifted by the number of times that the fluctuation display result is a small hit.

  That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the big hit game A is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, if all of the variable display results are lost, the 125th or 175th time after the big hit game ends. If the fluctuation display is executed in the super reach α loss fluctuation pattern and is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit game of the big hit B is finished, if the variable display results are all lost, the 174th or 224th after the big hit game ends. The first fluctuation display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss.

  If the big hit type in 211 SGS245 is a probable big hit (big hit C or big hit D) (211 SGS245; Y), the probability change flag is set (211 SGS262), the time reduction flag is set (211 SGS263), and the time reduction counter is set to “0”. "Is set (211 SGS264). Also, the cycle determination counter is cleared (211 SGS265).

  After executing the processing of 211 SGS261 or 211 SGS265, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag (211 SGS266), and performs transmission setting of the big hit end designation command according to the big hit type to be ended (211 SGS267). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time reduction flag (211 SGS268), the game state is the time reduction state (highly accurate high base state) Alternatively, the transmission setting of the background image designation command according to being in the low-accuracy base state) (211 SGS269a) and the transmission setting of the scenario data notification command according to the set scenario data are performed (211 SGS269b).

  Note that these jackpot end designation command, gaming state designation command, background image designation command, scenario data notification command are executed by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. And transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (211 SGS270), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 9-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 9-20, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether there is a command (211 SGS271). At this time, if there is no received command (211 SGS271; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

  When there is a reception command in 211SGS271 (211SGS271; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the reception command, it is determined whether or not the reception command is the first start opening prize designation command (211SGS272). ). When it is the first start opening winning designation command (211 SGS272; Y), a first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (211 SGS273). For example, in the processing of 211 SGS273, if a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 211SG192 Good.

  If the received command is not the first start opening prize designation command at 211 SGS272 (211 SGS272; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second start opening prize designation command (211 SGS274). When it is the second start opening winning designation command (211 SGS274; Y), a second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (211 SGS275). For example, in the processing of 211 SGS275, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command in 211 SGS274 (211 SGS274; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (211 SGS276). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in 211 SGS276 (211 SGS276; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (211 SGS277). If the received command is not a variable category command in 211 SGS277 (211 SGS277; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a period determination value notification command (211 SGS278). If the received command is not a period determination value notification command in 211 SGS278 (211 SGS278; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (211 SGS279). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (211 SGS279; Y), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (211 SGS280).

  If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command in 211 SGS279 (211 SGS279; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (211 SGS281). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (211 SGS281; Y), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (211 SGS282).

  Then, after executing any of the processes of 211SGS280 and 211SGS282, “1” indicating that the pending display mode is undecided is set to the display undecided flag of the stored entry (211SGS283).

  When the received command is a symbol designation command at 211 SGS276 (211 SGS276; Y), or when the received command is a variable category command at 211 SGS277 (211 SGS277; Y), the received command is a period determination value notification command at 211 SGS278. In the case (211 SGS278; Y) or after executing any of the processing of 211 SGS273, 211 SGS275, 211 SGS283, the received command is stored at the head of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A (not shown) (211 SGS284). Return to processing.

  In addition, when the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the pending storage is performed. The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the start winning receiving command buffer 211SG194A.

  If the received command is not the second reserved storage number notification command in 211 SGS281 (211 SGS281; N), it is determined whether the received command is a scenario data notification command (211 SGS285). When the received command is a scenario data notification command in 211 SGS285 (211 SGS285; Y), the scenario data set by the CPU 103 is specified and stored (211 SGS286), and the process returns to 211 SGS271. Note that the RAM 122 in the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment stores data corresponding to the scenario data A to the scenario data D in advance, and the effect control CPU 120 performs the following on the basis of the scenario data specified in 211SGS286. It is possible to specify a value set in the cycle determination counter in the cycle.

  If the received command is not a scenario data notification command in 211 SGS285 (211 SGS285; N), it is determined whether the received command is a background image designation command (211 SGS287). When the received command is a background image designation command in 211 SGS287 (211 SGS287; Y), a background image update process (211 SGS288) for switching (updating) the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is executed, and the process of 211 SGS271 Return to.

  When the received command is not a background image designation command in 211 SGS287 (211 SGS287; N), after setting according to another received command (211 SGS289), the process returns to 211 SGS271.

  Next, background image update processing in the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-21, in the background image update process, the effect control CPU 120 first applies the received background image designation command to the high base state background image indicating that the gaming state is the high base state. It is determined whether or not the command is for designating a change (211 SGS301). In the case of a command for designating a change to the high base state background image (211 SGS301; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the high base state background image, and the background image update processing ends (211 SGS302). ), If the command is not a command for designating a change to the background image for the high base state (211 SGS301; N), the received background image designation command indicates that the gaming state is the low base state. It is determined whether there is a command for designating a change to (211 SGS303).

  In the case of a command for designating a change to the background image for the low base state (211 SGS303; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image for the low base state, and the background image update process ends (211 SGS304). ), When the command is not a command for designating the change to the background image for the low base state (211 SGS303; N), the received background image designating command indicates that the background image in the image display device 5 has a remaining loop count counter value of 2 or more and Specifies that the value of the counter for period determination is 6 to 9, that is, a change to the background image before period variation indicating that it is a period in which four variations display of non-reach loss immediately before the predetermined period variation is executed. It is determined whether it is a command to be performed (211 SGS305).

  In the case of a command for designating a change to the background image before cycle change (211 SGS305; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image before cycle change, and the background image update process is terminated (211 SGS306). ), If the command is not a command for designating the change to the background image before cycle change (211 SGS305; N), the received background image designating command has a remaining loop number counter value of 2 or more and a cycle determination counter value of 5. It is determined whether there is a command for designating a change to the periodic variation background image indicating that there is, that is, a period (variation) for executing the predetermined periodic variation (211 SGS307).

  In the case of a command for designating a change to the periodic variation background image (211 SGS307; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the periodic variation background image, and the background image update processing is terminated (211 SGS308). When the command is not a command for designating a change to the period variation background image (211 SGS307; N), the received background image designation command has a remaining loop count counter value of 2 or more and a period determination counter value of 1 to 4. That is, it is determined whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the background image after cycle variation indicating that it is a period in which four variations display of non-reach loss immediately after the predetermined cycle variation is executed (211 SGS309). ).

  In the case of a command for designating a change to the post-periodic background image (211 SGS309; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the post-periodic background image and the background image update process is terminated (211 SGS310). ), When the command is not a command for designating the change to the background image after period variation (211 SGS309; N), the received background image designation command has a remaining loop count counter value of 1 and a period determination counter value of 6-9. That is, whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the background image for last cycle variation indicating that it is a period in which non-reach losing four variations display immediately before the last predetermined cycle variation is executed. Is determined (211 SGS311).

  In the case of a command for designating a change to the background image before the last cycle change (211 SGS311; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the background image before the last cycle change, and the background image update process is terminated. (211 SGS312), if the command is not a command for designating a change to the background image before the last cycle change (211 SGS311; N), the received background image designating command has a remaining loop number counter value of 1 and a cycle determination counter value of 1 5. That is, it is determined whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the final cycle variation background image indicating that the last predetermined cycle variation is to be executed (variation) (211 SGS313).

  In the case of a command for designating a change to the final cycle variation background image (211 SGS313; Y), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated to the final cycle variation background image, and the background image update processing is terminated (211 SGS314). ), If it is not a command for designating a change to the final cycle variation background image (211 SGS313; N), the received background image designation command has a remaining loop number counter value of 0, that is, the last predetermined cycle variation. It is determined whether or not the command is a command for designating a change to the background image for after the last cycle variation indicating that the predetermined cycle variation is not executed until the time period is already controlled and then controlled to the time reduction state (211 SGS315).

  In the case of a command designating a change to the background image after the last cycle change (211 SGS315; Y), the background image at the image display phase 5 is updated to the background image after the last cycle change, and the background image update processing is ended. (211 SGS 316), if it is not a command for designating the change to the background image for after the last cycle change (211 SGS 315; N), the background image in the image display device 5 is updated according to the other state (211 SGS 317). The update process ends.

  Next, the effect control process process in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (S161), and holds as a prefetch notice effect in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment. Determines whether or not to execute the display notice effect. And the pending display update process for updating the display mode and the number of pending displays of the pending display in the first reserved storage display area 211SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 211SG005U according to the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 211SGS194A And the process of S170-S177 is performed according to the value of the production | presentation control process flag set.

  FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 211SG194A (211SGS331) and determines whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag value is “1” ( 211 SGS332). When there is no entry whose display undetermined flag value is “1” (211 SGS332; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and when there is an entry whose display undetermined flag value is “1” (211 SGS332; Y) determines whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (211 SGS333). When the gaming state is the high base state (211 SGS333; Y), the process proceeds to 211 SGS339, and when the gaming state is the low base state (211 SGS333; N), the value of the period determination value notification command of the entry is specified (211 SGS334). ), It is determined whether or not the specified value is 0 (211 SGS335). Note that the value specified from the period determination value notification command in 211SGS334 of the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment is a value obtained by subtracting 5 from the value of the period determination counter as described above. In other words, the processing of 211 SGS 335 is a process of determining whether or not the entry has a possibility of a predetermined period variation (variation display executed with a variation pattern of super reach α when the variation display result is lost). is there.

  If the specified value is not 0 (211 SGS335; N), whether or not the value specified in 211 SGS334 is any one of 1 to 4, that is, an entry having the possibility of four variable displays immediately before a predetermined period. It is determined whether or not (211 SGS336). When the value specified in 211 SGS334 is not any of 1 to 4 (211 SGS336; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set to the period determination counter next based on the scenario data specified in 211 SGS286 of command analysis processing. (211 SGS337) is specified. Then, whether or not the difference between the next value set in the period determination counter and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 4 or less, that is, an entry having the possibility of four fluctuation displays immediately after the predetermined period. It is determined whether or not there is (211 SGS338a). Next, when the difference between the value set in the counter for period determination and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 5 or more (211SGS338a; N), the period is further determined based on the scenario data specified in 211SGS286 of command analysis processing. The initial value of the period determination counter is determined (211 SGS338b), and it is determined whether the difference between the initial value of the period determination counter of the period and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 9 or less (211 SGS338c).

  Whether the difference between the initial value of the period determination counter for the period and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 9 or less is determined based on the value specified in 211SGS334 from the actual period determination counter value. This is because the value is obtained by subtracting 5. When the difference between the initial value of the cycle determination counter of the cycle and the value specified in 211SGS334 is 10 or more, that is, the entry is a pending display of variation display executed after the fifth cycle counting from the predetermined cycle variation. In the case (211 SGS 338 c), the process proceeds to 211 SGS 339.

  In 211 SGS339, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is a big hit (211 SGS339). When the symbol designation command of the entry is a big hit (211 SGS339; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (211 SGS340), and the display mode of the hold display (pending display) is based on the specified jackpot type. The presence / absence of the notice effect and the notice type are determined (211 SGS341).

  In 211 SGS341, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the on-hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are decided at a decision rate as shown in FIG. 9-24 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 9-24 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display notice effect and the determination pattern of the display pattern (notice type) are varied according to the jackpot type specified in the processing of 211SGS340.

  Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the hold display announcement effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U. Is displayed.

  When the variable display result is a big hit, there is no case where the hold display notice effect is not determined to be executed, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is always decided and the display pattern α or the display is displayed as the display pattern (notice type). Either display pattern (notice type) of pattern β is determined.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (A), when the big hit type is a probable big hit (big hit C or big hit D), the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is displayed. The pattern α is set higher than the rate at which it is determined. On the other hand, when the big hit type is a non-probable big hit (big hit A or big hit B), the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set.

  With this setting, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is greater than when the display pattern α is displayed. This increases the probability that is a probable big hit, and can increase the expectation that the player will become a promising big hit.

  In the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the variation display result is “big hit”, the display of displaying the stored memory display in a white square (◇) is always performed by determining the execution of the reserved display notice effect. One of the display patterns β or the display pattern β displayed on the white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display result of the variable display is “big hit”. Even when there is a case, a case may be provided in which non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined as in the case where the variation display result is “losing”.

  In 211 SGS339, when the symbol designation command of the entry is lost or small hit (211 SGS339; N), the variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the newly stored entry is specified (211 SGS342). Specifically, it is only necessary to specify the variation pattern of “non-reach”, the variation pattern of “super reach”, and the variation pattern of “other” including normal reach and small hits from the variation category designation command of the entry. .

  Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the on-hold display announcement effect extracted from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 211SG193 and the variation pattern category specified in 211SGS343, the unillustrated loss By referring to the time hold display notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the hold display notice effect (211 SGS343).

  In 211 SGS343, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the on-hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are decided at a decision rate as shown in FIG. 9-24 (B). In the determination ratio setting example shown in FIG. 9-24 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the decision ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied according to the variation category identified in the processing of 211SGS342. Yes.

  Specifically, two types of display patterns α and display patterns β are provided as display patterns (notice types). Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined as the display pattern α, the hold display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold display is displayed in a white star shape (☆) in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U. When the hold display notice effect is determined to be non-executed, the hold display is a round shape (◯) and is displayed in the first hold storage display area 211SG005D or the second hold storage display area 211SG005U.

  As shown in FIG. 9-24 (B), when the variation display result is “losing” or “small hit” and the variation pattern category is “other”, the variation display result is “losing”. In addition, the ratio at which the hold display notice effect is executed (the ratio determined other than “no notice effect”) is set higher than when the variation pattern category is “non-reach”. In addition, when the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation pattern category is “super reach”, the fluctuation display result is “losing” or “small hit”, and the fluctuation pattern category is “other”. The ratio at which the hold display notice effect is executed (the ratio determined other than “no notice effect”) is set higher than that in the case of.

  When the display result of the change display is “losing” or “small hit” and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided, the change pattern category is “non-reach” if the change category is “other”. ”Is set higher than the case where the display pattern α is determined. In addition, when the variation pattern category is “super reach”, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the variation pattern category is “other”. Further, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined when the variation display result is “losing”, the variation pattern category is “non-reach” when the variation pattern category is “other”. When the display pattern β is determined to be higher than the case where the variation pattern category is “Super Reach”, the display pattern β is set to “other” than the variation pattern category. The rate at which β is determined is set high.

  If the fluctuation display result is “losing” or “small hit”, the hold display notice effect is not executed regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern category is “non-reach”, “other”, or “super-reach”. Is determined to be the highest, the hold display advance notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern β is determined to be the lowest.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (A) and 9-24 (B), when the variation display result is “big hit”, the hold display notice effect is determined not to be executed (no notice effect). The ratio of the display display α or the display pattern β to be determined is either fluctuation when the fluctuation display result is “lost” or “small hit”. The display pattern α or the display pattern β in the pattern category is set to be higher than the ratio to be determined.

  Furthermore, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined when the fluctuation display result is “losing (non-reach)”, “losing (super reach)”, “losing (other)”, or “small hit”. Is set such that the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit (probable big hit)”, when the execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

  With this setting, when the display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the hold display notice effect, the display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed). The fluctuation display result is more likely to be a “big hit”, especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, and the big hit type is a promising big hit. Since the ratio of C or big hit D increases, the expectation of the player can be increased.

  After execution of 211SGS343, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not execution of the hold display notice effect is determined in 211SGS343, that is, whether or not the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (211 SGS344).

  After executing the processing of 211 SGS341, or when execution of the hold display notice effect is decided (211 SGS344; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold indication flag of the entry. (211 SGS345). Specifically, if the determined display pattern (notice type) is a display pattern α in which the hold display is indicated by “◇”, “1” is set to the hold display flag of the entry, and the determined display pattern (notice type) If the display pattern β indicates that the hold display is indicated by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to 211 SGS348.

  Further, in 211 SGS 336, when the specified value is any one of 1 to 4 (211 SGS 336; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry is a reserved memory with a predetermined period variation according to the specified value and the number of reserved memories. It is determined whether or not there is (211 SGS345a). For example, if the specified value is 4 and the entry is the fourth reserved memory in the first special figure, the specified value is 3 and the entry is the third reserved memory in the first special figure If the specified value is 2 and the entry is the second reserved memory in the first special figure, the specified value is 1 and the entry is the first reserved memory in the first special figure For cases, etc., it is further determined whether or not there is already an entry whose period determination value notification command has the same value as the entry. If there is no entry whose period determination value notification command has the same value as the entry, it is determined that the entry is a pending storage of a predetermined period variation. If it is determined that the entry periodic storage fluctuation is held (211 SGS345b; Y), the process proceeds to 211SGS347b.

  In 211 SGS338a, when the difference between the value set next in the period determination value counter and the value specified from the period determination value notification command is 4 or less (211 SGS338a; Y), in 211SGS338c, the period determination counter of the period When the difference between the initial value and the value specified in 211 SGS 334 is 9 or less (211 SGS 338 c; Y), in 211 SGS 344, when non-execution of the hold display notice effect is decided (211 SGS 344; N), 211 SGS 345 b, the random cycle of the entry If it is determined that the change is not stored on hold (211 SGS345b; N), “0” indicating white “O” is set in the hold display flag of the entry as non-execution of the hold display notice effect (211 SGS346). 211 SGS348 Advance.

  Furthermore, in 211 SGS335, when the specified value is 0 (211 SGS335; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an entry for which a value (“1”) corresponding to the display pattern α is already set in the hold display flag. (211 SGS347a). When there is an entry for which the value (“1”) corresponding to the display pattern α is already set in the hold display flag (211 SGS347a; Y), the hold display flag of the entry is white as non-execution of the hold display notice effect. “0” indicating “O” of “2” is set (211 SGS346), and the process proceeds to 211 SGS348. Further, when no value corresponding to the display pattern buffer is set in the hold display flag for any entry (211 SGS347a; N), the value corresponding to the display pattern α (“1”) is set in the hold display flag of the entry. Is set (211 SGS347b), and the process proceeds to 211SGS348.

  In 211 SGS348, the CPU 120 for effect control sets “0” indicating that the display mode of the hold display is determined to the display undecided flag of the entry, and ends the prefetching advance notice setting process.

  As described above, by executing the pre-reading notice setting process in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment, the pending display notice is provided for the change display four times before and after the change display corresponding to the possibility of execution of the predetermined period change. Execution of production can be regulated.

  The case where scenario data A is set will be described as an example with respect to the execution restriction of the hold display notice effect. First, as shown in FIG. 9-25, for the high base state after the end of the non-probable big hit game (the first cycle in which the fluctuation display of 1 to 50 times in FIG. 9-25 is executed) As shown in 211 SGS333, the hold display notice effect can be executed regardless of the value of the cycle determination value notification command.

  Next, when the gaming state changes to the low base state and “79”, which is the value of the second period, is set in the period determination counter, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the period determination counter is 79-10. In the period (period in which the value specified from the cycle determination notification command is 74 to 5), the hold display notice effect can be executed for all the hold displays. However, in the hold display notice effect execution restriction period (the period specified from the period determination notification command is 4 to 0 and 127 to 124) in which the value of the period determination counter is 9 to 1, the period determination value notification command Unless the value specified from 0 is 0, the hold display notice effect is not executed.

  Thereafter, also in the third to fourteenth periods, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the period determination counter value is 9 to 1, the hold display notice effect execution restriction period (the value specified from the period determination notification command is 4 to 0). In the period of 127 to 124), the hold display notice effect is not executed unless the value specified from the cycle determination value notification command is 0.

  As shown in FIG. 9-25, after all the fluctuation display results are lost and the last predetermined period fluctuation display ends, after the four non-reach loss fluctuation display after the last predetermined period fluctuation display is executed. Thereafter (the fluctuation display after the 1894th change after the end of the non-probability big hit game), the value of the remaining loop number counter and the value of the period determination counter do not change from 0, so the effect control CPU 120 reads ahead. In the notice setting process 211 SGS 334, “123” is always specified from the period determination value notification command. That is, N (the specified value is not 0) in the 211SG335 process of the pre-reading notice setting process, N (the specified value is not 1 to 4) in the 211SG336 process, and N (the next cycle determination in the 211SGS338a process) Since there is no value set in the counter for counter, the difference between the next value set in the counter for period determination and the value specified from the period determination value notification command is 5 or more). After the four non-reach losing fluctuation displays are executed, the hold display notice effect can be executed for all the hold indications at all times (there is no execution restriction period for the hold display notice effect).

  As shown in FIG. 9-26, the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to each gaming state, the value of the remaining loop number counter, and the value of the period determination counter.

  In particular, during the four fluctuations immediately before the predetermined cyclic fluctuation, the predetermined cyclic fluctuation, and the four fluctuations immediately after the predetermined cyclic fluctuation, the image display device 5 respectively uses the background image for the front of the peripheral road and the background image for the cyclic fluctuation. Since the background image for the period variation is displayed, the player visually recognizes the background image, immediately before the execution of the predetermined cycle variation, the execution of the predetermined cycle variation, and the predetermined cycle variation has already ended. It is possible to recognize each of them.

  Furthermore, in the 14th period (the state of the remaining loop number counter being 1), during the 4 fluctuations immediately before the predetermined period fluctuation, during the predetermined period fluctuation, and during the 4 fluctuations immediately after the predetermined period fluctuation, Since background images (background image before final cycle variation, background image for final cycle variation, background image after final week variation) different from the second to thirteenth cycles are displayed, the player visually recognizes these background images. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that a new predetermined cycle fluctuation is not executed unless the fluctuation display result is a big hit (unless it is controlled to the short time state after the big hit game is finished).

  It should be noted that in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the period determination counter value (period determination value) is 1 to 9 (except when the period determination counter value is 5), and the pending display notice Although the execution execution restriction period is illustrated as an example, if the execution restriction period of the hold display notice effect is not provided, the hold display notice is provided during the period in which the value of the cycle determination counter is 1 to 9. This is because the effect pattern of the effect and the change pattern of the variable display that is the target of the hold display notice effect may differ greatly.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-27, when the number of the second reserved memory is 0 and the value of the period determination counter is 13, if 4 reserved memories of the first special figure are generated, these 4 For each of the stored memories, the variation category is determined by using any one of the variation pattern determination table for loss A to the variation pattern determination table for loss D in the winning random number determination process.

  Then, after the variable display being executed is completed, the value of the cycle determination counter is 12 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command) for the variable display based on the first hold storage among these four hold memories. 7) For the variable display based on the second hold memory, the value of the cycle determination counter is 11 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 6), and for the variable display based on the third hold memory, the period Based on the value of the determination counter being 10 (the value indicated by the period determination value notification command is 5), the variation pattern is determined using any one of the variation pattern determination table A for loss and the variation pattern determination table D for loss. Is determined.

  However, for the variation display based on the fourth hold storage, the variation pattern determination table F for loss is used based on the value of the cycle determination counter being 9 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 4). Thus, the variation pattern is determined (the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach PA1-2). That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when the change category is non-reach in the pre-reading notice setting process, non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 100% (FIG. 9-24 ( In spite of (see B), it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect for non-reach fluctuations by not providing the execution restriction period of the hold display notice effect.

  In the above description, the execution restriction period of the hold display notice effect when the value of the cycle determination counter is 6 to 9 has been described, but the reason is the same for the case where the value of the cycle determination counter is 1 to 4. is there.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-23, when the value specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the period determination value notification command is 0, the period determination value notification command is stored. It is determined that the entry being stored is a hold storage with a predetermined cycle variation, and the display mode of the target hold display is displayed in the display pattern α, but the value specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the cycle determination value notification command is 1. Even in the case of ~ 4, by executing the processing of 211 SGS345a, as shown in FIG. 9-28, the reserved memory of the predetermined periodic fluctuation is estimated from the value specified from the period judgment value notification command and the number of the stored memories In addition, it is possible to display the display mode of the hold display with the display pattern α over a plurality of change displays for the hold storage estimated to be the predetermined cycle fluctuation.

  In addition, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the hold memory that is estimated to be the predetermined cycle fluctuation, the second special figure hold memory is newly generated before the change display based on the hold memory is started. As a result, there is a possibility that the reserved memory for executing the predetermined cycle fluctuation may shift, that is, it is impossible to accurately pre-read the actual fluctuation pattern, so the reserved memory that is estimated to be the predetermined cycle fluctuation When the hold display notice effect is executed for the target, the hold display based on the hold storage is determined to be a display pattern (display pattern α) that does not strongly suggest the fluctuation display result or the expected level.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, by executing pre-reading notice setting processing as shown in FIG. 9-23, a hold display and a hold display notice that can execute a hold display notice effect within the hold display. There may be cases where both a pending display and an effect cannot be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-29, there are four reserved memories as the first special figure reserved memory, and the first and second reserved memories have the values of the counters for period determination. 10 (the value indicated by the cycle judgment value notification command is 5), and the third and fourth hold memories have a cycle judgment counter value of 9 (the cycle judgment value notification command This is the case where the stored value is generated when the indicated value is 4).

  In the state shown in FIG. 9-28, as shown in FIG. 9-23, the values specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the period determination value notification command in the processing of 211SGS336 for the first and second reserved storages are the same. The processing after 211 SGS 338a is executed based on being 5 or more (211 SGS 336; N), that is, the hold display corresponding to the first hold memory or the second hold memory is displayed as the hold display notice effect. It may be displayed with α or display pattern β.

  However, for the third and fourth reserved memories, 211SGS345a, based on the fact that the value specified from the period determination value notification command by the effect control CPU 120 is any one of 1 to 4 (211SGS336; Y). The processing of 211 SGS346 is executed unless it is determined (estimated) that the predetermined periodic fluctuation is held in 211 SGS345b, that is, the hold display corresponding to the third hold memory or the fourth hold memory as the hold display notice effect. Is not displayed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β.

  In addition, even after the predetermined period fluctuation has ended, both a hold display in which the hold display notice effect can be executed and a hold display in which the hold display notice effect cannot be executed may occur in the hold display. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-30, there are four reserved memories as the first special figure reserved memory, and the first and second reserved memories have the value of the counter for period determination. 70 (the value indicated by the cycle determination value notification command is 75). The third and fourth hold storages have a cycle determination counter value of 69 (the cycle determination value notification command This is the case where the stored value is generated when the indicated value is 74).

  In the state shown in FIG. 9-30, as shown in FIG. 9-23, with respect to the first and second hold memories, the values specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the period determination value notification command in the processing of 211SGS338c Based on the difference between the period and the initial period determination counter being 9 or less (211 SGS 338 c; N), the process of 211 SGS 346 is executed. The hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is not displayed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β.

  However, for the third and fourth reserved memories, the difference between the value specified by the effect control CPU 120 from the period determination value notification command and the initial period determination counter for the period is 10 or more (211 SGS338c ; Y), the processing after 211 SGS339 is executed, that is, the hold display corresponding to the third hold memory and the fourth hold memory is set as the display pattern α and the display pattern β as the hold display notice effect. May be displayed.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, when a new hold memory is generated in a period during which the hold display notice effect can be executed, the hold control newly generated by the effect control CPU 120 executing the prefetch setting process. Although the hold display announcement effect can be executed for the hold display according to the memory, as shown in FIGS. 9-31 (A) and 9-31 (B), the hold display announcement effect can be executed. If a power interruption occurs in the state where there is a reserved memory that occurred during the period, the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 211SGS194A are not backed up after the recovery from the power interruption, and these reserved memories are targeted The hold display notice effect cannot be executed. On the other hand, with respect to the reserved memory that has occurred after the recovery from the power interruption, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the cycle judgment value notification command, etc. are stored in the entry command reception command buffer 211SGS194A for each start entry. A hold display notice effect can be executed for a hold memory that has occurred after recovery from a break.

  Next, a display mode of the image display device 5 with a predetermined cycle variation in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 9-32. FIG. 9-32 illustrates a case where scenario data A is set by the CPU 103 after the big hit game ends.

  First, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (A), the time reduction control is performed over 50 fluctuation displays. Note that during the time-short control, every time the variation display is completed, the first period determination counter value is subtracted, but the variation pattern is not determined based on the period determination counter value. .

  Next, after the time reduction state is completed, a value (80) corresponding to the second cycle in the scenario data A is set in the cycle determination counter. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-32 (B) and 9-32 (C), when the fluctuation display result ends 70 times without a big hit or a small hit, the value of the cycle determination counter is displayed. Based on this, non-reach loss variation is displayed four times.

  As shown in 9-32 (D), if a start prize corresponding to a predetermined period variation occurs while the non-reach loss variation display is performed four times, the start prize is displayed as a hold display notice effect. The original hold display is displayed with the display pattern α.

  Then, after the non-reach loss variation display is performed four times, the super reach α loss variation display is performed as the predetermined period variation.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 sets any one of the scenario data shown in FIG. A value corresponding to the first cycle of the scenario data is set in the cycle determination counter. Then, every time the fluctuation display whose fluctuation display result is lost is finished, the value of the period determination counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the period determination counter becomes 5, the super reach α is determined as a predetermined period fluctuation. Executes the fluctuation display of the loss, and sets the value corresponding to the next period in the set scenario data to the period determination counter based on the fact that the value of the period determination counter has become 0. Every time the fluctuation display whose result is lost is finished, the subtraction of the value of the period determination counter and the execution of the predetermined period fluctuation according to the value of the period determination counter becoming 5 are repeated.

  In particular, the value set in the period determination counter in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment is different depending on the number of times the predetermined period variation has been executed so far. Since the timing at which the fluctuation is executed can be changed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the game becoming monotonous. As described above, each time the predetermined condition in the present invention is satisfied (the value of the predetermined period counter is 5), the variation display by the variation pattern of the super reach α azurase is executed, so that the player is monotonous with the game. Can be avoided, and interest can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 9-18, the scenario data set after the end of the big hit game of the non-probable big hit (big hit A or big hit B) differs according to the type of the big hit game (big hit type). . For this reason, after the big hit game of big hit A is completed, if all of the fluctuation display results are lost, the 125th or 175th fluctuation display after the big hit game is finished is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α lose, If all the variation display results are lost after the big hit game of B is finished, the 174th or 224th variation display after the big hit game is finished is executed with the variation pattern of the super reach α lose. That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations until the fluctuation display in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss is first executed as a predetermined period fluctuation according to the big hit type of the big hit game that has ended. In addition, it is possible to avoid the monotonous tendency of the selection pattern of the variation pattern of Super Reach α Loss, and to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, an example in which the number of fluctuations until the predetermined period fluctuation is performed according to the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the fluctuation pattern of the predetermined period variation is changed according to the type of jackpot of the jackpot game that has ended (for example, after the jackpot game of jackpot A, if the variation display results are all lost, after the jackpot game ends) From the 125th or 175th time, a predetermined period fluctuation is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss, and after the big hit game of the big hit B, if the fluctuation display results are all lost, the 125th or (In the 175th time, a predetermined period fluctuation may be executed with a fluctuation pattern of super reach β loss).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-18, scenario data A or scenario data B is set after the big hit A game is finished, so the period determination counter is set to “50”, “79”, “100”, While four values of “128” can be set, scenario data C or scenario data D is set after the jackpot B game ends, so the period determination counter is set to “50”, “100”. , “128” can be set. That is, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, since at least a part of the value set in the period determination counter differs according to the finished jackpot type, the number of fluctuations until the predetermined period fluctuation is executed. Selection can be easily realized.

  In the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which some of the values that can be set in the period determination counter are different after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A and after the big hit game of the big hit B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the values that can be set in the period determination counter may be different after the end of the big hit game of the big hit A and after the end of the big hit game of the big hit B. The values that can be set in the period determination counter may be the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-11, the CPU 103 outputs a cycle determination value notification command corresponding to the value of the cycle determination value counter to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). As shown in FIG. 9-23, the CPU 120 can execute the hold display notice effect based on the value specified from the received period determination value notification command, that is, the number of fluctuations until the predetermined period fluctuation starts.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-28, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of 211SGS345a and 211SGS345b, thereby holding the display based on the hold storage that is presumed to be the hold storage of a predetermined cycle variation. Is displayed in the display pattern α over a plurality of variation displays, so that the variation display corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display pattern α is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach α loss. Can increase expectations and improve interest.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 and 9-14, when any value of 1 to 128 is not set in the period determination counter, and when the value of the remaining loop number counter is 0, the period determination counter When the value set in the counter is not 1 to 9, when the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern determination table A for loss and the variation pattern determination table D for loss in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the super reach α loss (PA2-2) can be determined, but as shown in FIG. 9-14, when the value of the counter for period determination is 6 to 9, that is, before the predetermined period fluctuation 1 to 4 fluctuations, the fluctuation display result is If it is a loss, the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is uniquely determined by selecting the loss variation pattern determination table F. The fluctuation display is not executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss in the fluctuation immediately before the predetermined period fluctuation, and the fluctuation display that is the target of the presentation mode of the hold display notice effect becomes unclear and the hold display notice It is possible to prevent the production interest from deteriorating.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-14, when the CPU 103 determines that the time reduction flag is set in the processing of 211 SGS181 of the variation pattern setting processing, that is, the number of times that the time reduction control is executed at the end of the big hit game. When the same number as “50” or “100” is set as the initial value of the cycle determination counter, selecting the loss variation pattern determination table D corresponds to the value of the cycle determination counter being 5. However, when “79” or “128” is set as the initial value in the period determination counter while the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of the super reach α loss is not uniquely determined, If the value is 5, by selecting the losing variation pattern determination table E, the super reach α losing variation pattern (PA2- 2) is decided. For this reason, in the characteristic part 211SG of the present embodiment, the value of the period determination counter is set in common when the gaming state is the short-time state (high base state) and when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). On the other hand, since the fluctuation display of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period fluctuation can be executed only in the low base state, the selection tendency of the fluctuation pattern that matches the gaming state can be simply realized.

  In the present embodiment, a mode in which the predetermined cycle variation is not executed in the high base state is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the cycle determination counter is also in the high base state. The predetermined period variation may be executed based on the fact that becomes 5.

  When the predetermined cycle variation can be executed even in the high base state as described above, the cycle determination counter in the high base state is different from the value of the number of time-saving controls (for example, different from “50” or “100”). By setting “30”, “80”, etc.), the predetermined periodic fluctuation may be executed in fluctuations other than the final fluctuation in the high base state. In addition, when the predetermined periodic fluctuation is executed in the high base state as described above, the predetermined periodic fluctuation is executed using a reach loss variation pattern (for example, a super reach β loss variation or a normal reach loss variation pattern) different from the low base state. May be. Furthermore, when executing a predetermined cycle variation in the high base state, an initial value corresponding to the number of final variations in the high base state is set in the cycle determination counter (for example, in the case of the feature unit 211SG of the present embodiment). By setting “54” or “104” corresponding to the 50th or 100th variation display in the high base state, the final variation in the high base state may be executed with a dedicated variation pattern. By doing in this way, the effect which displays the number of prize balls acquired by the number of consecutive times on the image display device 5 in the final change of a high base state can be performed suitably.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number determination process shown in FIGS. 9-11 to execute a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category designation command, a reserved memory count notification command, a cycle judgment value notification command, and the like. It is possible to output to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120), and the effect control CPU 120 uses the value specified from the period determination value notification command or the symbol designation command in the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 9-23. The hold display notice effect can be appropriately executed from the fluctuation display result indicated by the fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes transmission setting of the pending storage number notification command in the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 9-10, and the symbol designation command and the variable category designation command in the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 9-11. By executing the transmission setting and executing the command control process shown in FIG. 4, each command for which these transmission settings have been performed is output to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). In the pre-reading notice setting process of 9-23, the hold display notice effect can be executed based on the value of the hold memory number, the change category, and the period determination value notification command specified from these received commands. In particular, in the characteristic unit 211SG of the present embodiment, by executing 211SGS345a, 211SGS345b, 211SGS347, the reserved memory of the predetermined cycle fluctuation is estimated from the value of the reserved memory number and the period determination value notification command, and based on the estimation It is possible to execute a hold display notice effect.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 211SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (B), when the start winning is generated a plurality of times during the display of 1 variation, the CPU 103 receives the start winning at the time of winning. Since the period determination value notification command indicating the same value is output to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) by executing the random value determination process, the effect control CPU 120 executes or does not execute the hold display notice effect. By referring to the period determination value notification command indicating the same value when determining the value, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate hold display notice effect from being executed.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the same value (“50” or “100”) as the number of fluctuations in which the short-time control is performed in the cycle determination counter after the big hit game of the non-probable big hit, and the CPU 103 sets FIG. As shown in the figure, the value of the cycle determination counter is decremented by 1 every time the variable display is finished, and a cycle determination notification command corresponding to the value is sent to the cycle determination counter after the subtraction, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the remaining short time number from the cycle determination notification command without separately providing commands that allow the effect control CPU 120 to specify the remaining short time number.

  Furthermore, in the feature part 211SG of the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the background image update process shown in FIGS. 9-21, whereby the gaming state is the high base state and the gaming state is the low base state. It is easy for the player that the four fluctuations immediately before the predetermined periodic fluctuation are being executed, the predetermined cyclic fluctuation is being executed, the four fluctuations immediately after the predetermined cyclic fluctuation are being executed, and the like. Can be recognized.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variation pattern is determined only by lottery based on each variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of non-reach loss may continue to be selected due to a probability deviation or the like. In such a case, the reach effect of super reach and the like is not executed for a long time, which is a factor of deteriorating the game entertainment interest. Therefore, the feature unit 211SG of the above embodiment exemplifies a form in which the change display is executed with the change pattern of the super reach α loss for each predetermined change by using scenario data as shown in FIG. 9-18. However, in this case, since it is necessary to store in advance in the ROM 101 data for a long period (up to 1894 fluctuations depending on the scenario data as shown in FIG. 9-25) as each scenario data. It is conceivable that the memory capacity of

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9-33 as modified example 211SG-1, at the end timing of the big hit game, the number of fluctuations in each cycle is determined by lottery from a plurality of fluctuations stored in advance, and scenario data is obtained. You may make it create.

  When the number of fluctuations in each cycle is determined by lottery in this way, for example, the number of fluctuations in each cycle may be determined at a different rate for each jackpot type of the finished jackpot game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (B), when the big hit type is big hit A, the number of fluctuations in each cycle is 50 times at a rate of 50%, 79 times at a rate of 30%, 20 On the other hand, when the big hit type is big hit B, the number of fluctuations in each cycle is 50 times at a rate of 10%, 79 times at a rate of 40%, and 128 at a rate of 50%. Decide on times. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to specify the number of fluctuations in each cycle, so that the player can be more focused on the execution of the predetermined cycle variation in each cycle. You can improve your interest.

  Moreover, in this modification 211SG-1, although the form which determines the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation of the whole period from the 1st period to the 14th period by lottery is illustrated, this invention is not limited to this, A fluctuation | variation The period for determining the number of times may be only a part.

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 211SG of the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form that restricts execution of the hold display notice effect based on the value specified from the period determination value notification command. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is displaying the pre-periodic background image or the post-periodic background image as the background image, or the received background image designation command is for the pre-periodic change. Execution of the hold display notice effect may be restricted based on a command that designates a change to the background image or a command that designates a change to the background image after period variation.

  The feature unit 207SG of the above embodiment exemplifies a pachinko gaming machine in which the set value can be set in a plurality of stages, and the advantage for the player differs depending on the set value set. In the feature unit 211SG, the pachinko gaming machine that executes the variation display with the variation pattern of the super reach α loss every predetermined cycle is illustrated. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention includes the feature unit 207SG and the feature unit 211SG. It may be possible to implement both.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can implement both the characteristic portion 207SG and the characteristic portion 211SG, for example, the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation and the variation of the super reach α loss that is not the predetermined cycle variation. The setting value suggesting effect that suggests the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed, and the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation and the variation of the super reach α loss that is not the predetermined cycle variation The execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect may be different (for example, the execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect during the fluctuation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period fluctuation is not the predetermined period fluctuation). Higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect during the fluctuation of the Those who run rate settings suggested effect during variation Les is higher than the execution rate of the set value suggested effect during variation of super reach α loss as a predetermined periodic variation).

  In addition, when the set value suggestion effect can be executed in the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation, the execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the variation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation of each cycle is different. (For example, the execution ratio of the set value suggesting effect during the fluctuation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period fluctuation of the 14th period is during the change of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period fluctuation of the first period. The execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect during the fluctuation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined cycle variation in the first cycle is higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect in the super cycle as the predetermined cycle variation in the 14th cycle. Higher than the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect during the fluctuation of the reach α loss, the super as the predetermined period fluctuation of the seventh period The execution ratio of the setting value suggestion effect during the fluctuation of the reach α loss is the highest, and the execution ratio of the setting value suggestion effect during the fluctuation of the super reach α loss as the predetermined period fluctuation in the first period and the 14th period is the lowest. ).

  Moreover, in the characteristic part 211SG of the above embodiment, the CPU 103 for effect control can specify the remaining short time control count by the CPU 103 outputting a cycle determination notification command, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the effect control CPU 120 determines the remaining short-time control count for the player by the display on the image display device 5 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the value specified from the period determination value notification command. You may notify.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 4A 1st special symbol display 4B 2nd special symbol display 5 Production display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can execute variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns;
Variable display means capable of executing variable display according to the determined variable display pattern;
Specific state control means that is controllable to a specific state that is different from the advantageous state and that is advantageous to the player;
It is determined whether one predetermined condition among a plurality of predetermined conditions corresponding to the number of executions of variable display is satisfied, including a first predetermined condition corresponding to the specific state and a second predetermined state corresponding to the non-specific state Condition judging means for
With
The variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.
A gaming machine characterized in that the type of the predetermined condition varies depending on the number of times the predetermined condition is satisfied.

Images